Home

Panasonic KX-UT248NE LCD Wired handset Black IP phone

1. However there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows Number field You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters You cannot leave the field empty IP Address field You can enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation i e n n n n where n 0 255 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 25 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming You cannot enter invalid IP addresses for example 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 127 0 0 1 e FQDN field The field cannot contain amp lt gt or trailing spaces You can enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation i e n n n n where n 0 255 You cannot enter invalid IP addresses for example 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 127 0 0 1 e Authentication ID Password field The field cannot contain amp lt gt or space The length of user password and administrator password must be from 6 to 16 characters Display Name field gt see Display Name in 4 6 2 1 Call Control This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters Result Messages 26 When you click Save after changing the settings on the current configuration screen one of the following messages will appear in the upper left area of the current configuration screen Result Message Description Applicable Screens
2. Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Tone Settings Web Port Close Tone Frequencies 350 440 EE E ames Tone Frequencies 480 620 Flexible Button Settings NEIE 160 500 440 Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies 440 480 Tone Timings 10 2000 3040 Tone Frequencies 350 440 Tone Timings 560 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1001 Tone Frequencies 480 620 Tone Timings 60 250 190 4 6 4 1 Dial Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of dial tones using 2 whole numbers separated by acomma 136 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 4 Tone Settings Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Note e Ifthe value for this setting is 350 440 the unit will use a mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone Default Value 350 440 Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE1_FRQ Page 211 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of dial tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e The unit will not play the tone for the duration of the first value play it for the duration of the second value stop it for the duration of the third value play it again for the duration of the fourth value and so on The whole sequence will then repeat For example if the value for this setting is
3. ussssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nme nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 111 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents 4 5 2 9 Timer settings tee aa A ee 111 EE Ur VE 111 TZ HUE 111 Mer EE 112 Blut RETTEN 112 HMEC KEE 112 Blo WEE 112 Blue 113 O20 a 18 1122 of Service QOS E 113 SIP Packet O05 DSCP EE 113 4 5 2 11 SIP extensions eee 113 S pp rts 100rel RFC 3262 een 113 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 22 c scccsesceesesesncceeeceesnensandacesteeneeeannesnaaees 113 4 5 2 12 ee EE 114 Keep Alive Interna 114 Supports Rport RFC 2881 114 4 5 2 13 SEENEN deeg ee 114 Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 2 cccccssecnssesnssnnscnneceteeeeeeeeeeeeee 114 4 5 3 VOIR EE gene cae ee ere ene e EE EE reer ert Tier 115 4 5 3 1 A He EE 115 RTP Packet Time ireira eaaa AAEE EAA AEA aa EnEn ana aa daai 115 Minimum RTP Port Number 115 Maximum RTP Port Number nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn 116 Telephone event Payload Type ee ea 116 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line Ines 117 4 5 4 1 Q ality of Serties EE 117 RTP Packet CR AE 117 RTOP Packet QoS DCH 117 4 5 4 2 Statistical Information ccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaaeaaaeasesaneeeeenseeeseeeeeeeees 118 RTCP Ela EE 118 RTCP Internal 118 4 5 4 3 lte LEE 118 Maximum E 118 DOMED UCT E 118 tial Delay eege eebe 119 4 5 4 4 BIME EE 119 BIT 200 ke 1
4. Web User Interface Reference Country Calling Code Page 125 NATIONAL ACCESS CODE Value Format String Description When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a symbol and the country calling code matches the country calling code is removed and the national access code is added Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference National Access Code Page 125 DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is specified in the dialing operation Note e The available line number varies depending on the type of the unit being used Value Range 1 2 for KX UT113 KX UT 123 1 4 for KX UT133 KX UT 136 1 6 for KX UT248 Default Value 1 Web User Interface Reference Default Line for Outgoing Page 125 DATA_LINE_MODE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable sending and receiving using data line mode Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 207 5 5 1 Call Control Settings Value Range e y Enable Data Line Mode e N Disable Data Line Mode Default Value N NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT Value Format String Description Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call pickup Value Ra
5. Complete The operation has successfully completed All screens except 4 6 7 Export Phonebook Failed Parameter Error The operation failed because All screens Some specified values are out of range or invalid Failed Memory Access The operation failed because All screens Failure e Access error to the flash memory occurred while reading or writing the data Failed Transfer Failure The operation failed because All screens e A network error occurred during the data transmission Failed Busy The operation failed because All screens e The unit is in an operation that accesses the flash memory of the unit e When attempting to import export the phonebook data the unit is on a call e While transferring the phonebook data a Call arrived at the unit 4 6 6 Import Phonebook 4 6 7 Export Phonebook e When updating the firmware the unit is ona call 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update Failed Canceled The operation failed because e While transferring the phonebook data IP Reset was performed on the unit 4 6 6 Import Phonebook 4 6 7 Export Phonebook e While transferring the firmware file IP Reset was performed on the unit 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update e While transferring the phonebook data the connection with the unit was interrupted 4 6 6 Import Phonebook 4 6 7 Export Phonebook Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 1 7 Other Network Settings
6. Configuration File Reference VM_NUMBER_n Page 242 Enable Shared Call Description Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server which is used to share one line among the units Note e You cannot set both Enable Shared Call and Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward to Yes at the same time e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the SIP server will control the line by using a shared call signaling method If you select No the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method Default Value No Configuration File Reference SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n Page 243 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward 128 Description Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone system dealer Note e Even if you select Yes this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it Before you configure this setting consult your phone system dealer e You cannot set both Enable Shared Call and Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward to Yes at the same time Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n Pag
7. Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 2000 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_ TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer 220 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 2 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using up to 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 800 400 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 3 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using up to 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 400 200 400 200 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 4 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using up to 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Inf
8. ccccsesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeneees 59 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List uuesssssnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnn 60 4 2 LE TEE 71 4 2 1 Version Information EE 72 4 2 1 1 Version Information c cccceccceccceccceecseeeseeseueeseaeseeaeseueeeeaueeaseueauueeaueeaeueaeeeaseueaeeenaeens 72 Model EE en nenn en len 72 Operating Bank eege 72 IPEVO BEE 72 Firmware Version uuuuassssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 72 4 2 2 Network EC 73 4 2 2 1 Network Status uanuunsnsseaneennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 73 MAC e ele 73 Ethernet Link Status LAN Port aaa te A eegene eegeeg h Eege 73 Ethernet Link Status PC Port KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 ln AE 73 Connection MOG EE 74 IS elle 74 SU BNELMASK EE 74 IR 74 DNS Kee dE 75 DIN LEE EE 75 IEEE802 1X Status KX UT248 only 0 ccecccceeeeceeeeeeeaaeeaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaes 75 4 2 3 Ve EE EE 75 4 2 3 1 VOIP CN 76 Line Le NEEN 76 Phone N mber 0 ca a a ae ESA 76 NW ke IS EE 76 4 3 NETWOrK ee ee Eege 77 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings JPRANEBERERUERNLPEDEEONDBERENERILHEIEEEEEFEILEERFHBERSERERAUBEPEEERDEFEULEUFRREPLERPBEDEBEREEBENE 77 4 3 1 1 Connection fl ee EE 78 Connection ele anne 78 4 3 1 2 DIG PS rie E 78 Host EI 78 Domain Name Server uuenseeessun
9. 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range Max 40 characters Note An empty string is not allowed If mac is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the units MAC address in upper case If MODELY is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name e H fwver is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Web User Interface Reference SIP User Agent Page 105 PHONE_NUMBER_n Parameter Name Example PHONE_NUMBER_1 PHONE _NUMBER_2 PHONE MOMPER Value Format String Description Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server Note e When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number you should use the SIP_URI_n setting Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Phone Number Page 106 SIP_URI_n Parameter Name Example SIP_URI_1 SIP_URI_2 SIP_URI_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip user example
10. IEEE802 1X Status KX UT248 only Description Indicates the current status of IEEE 802 1X settings Value Range e Authenticating e Authenticated e Authenticated In Condition e Failed Time Out e Failed e Not Connected e Disabled Default Value Not applicable 4 2 3 VoIP Status This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line s unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 75 4 2 3 VoIP Status Clicking Refresh updates the information displayed on the screen Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance VoIP Status Web Port Close Refresh GE Line No Phone Number VoIP Status 0 6039 Registered y9 6040 Registering 30 KA 4 2 3 1 VoIP Status Line No Description Indicates the line number to which a phone number is assigned reference only Note e The available line number varies depending on the type of the unit being used Value Range e Line 1 Line 2 for KX UT113 KX UT123 e Line 1 Line 4 for KX UT133 KX UT136 e Line 1 Line 6 for KX UT248 Default Value Not applicable Phone Number Description Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers reference only Note e The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased or if the unit has not been configured Value Range Max 32 digits Default Value Not applicable VoIP Status Desc
11. HTTP_USER_AGENT Page 200 4 3 4 2 HTTP Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the ID for the User account If set this name must be entered to access the Web user interface at the User access level Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Authentication Password Description Specifies the password for the User account If set this password must be entered to access the Web user interface at the User access level Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored 4 3 4 3 Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy Description Selects whether to use the proxy server Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 89 4 3 5 Global Address Detection Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server Max 127 characters Value Range Note You cannot leave this field empty if Enable Proxy is set to Yes Default Value Not stored Proxy Server Port Description Specifies the port number of the proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 8080 4 3 5 Global Address Detection This screen allows you to configure the Global Address Detection feature and STUN server settings The global IP address of the network the unit is connected to will be detected periodica
12. Changing this setting may require restarting the unit 178 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 500 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt scheme gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 128 characters lt password gt must be less than 128 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt scheme gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 245 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with FIRM_VERSION depending on the system Note that this rule differs from other parameters such as SIP_USER_AGENT Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Firmware File URL Page 147 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings OPTION66_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the unit to look for option 66 to re
13. Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting e Ifyou have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server but the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server e If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting e You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 4 6 2 1 Call Control or through configuration file programming gt see FWD_DND_SYNCHRO ENABLE_n in 5 7 1 Call Control Settings Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 133 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x No Answer Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of
14. 1 TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT_HANDSET Value Format Integer Description Specifies the duration in seconds that a disconnect tone will be heard when the other party ends a call and the handset is being used Value Range 1 15 Default Value 10 TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT_HANDSFREE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the duration in seconds that a disconnect tone will be heard while in hands free mode when the other party ends a call Value Range 1 15 Default Value 3 KEY_PAD_TONE Value Format Boolean 210 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings Description Selects whether a tone is heard in response to key presses Value Range e yY Enable Key Pad Tone e N Disable Key Pad Tone Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Key Click Tone Page 140 HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether or not to enable making a call while having a call on hold Value Range e yY Hold and Call e WN Hold and Idle Default Value Y HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the method of transferring calls Value Range e Y Enable Press the Hold button to transfer a call e N Disable Press the Transfer button to transfer a call Default
15. 4 3 3 IEEE802 1X Settings KX UT248 only This screen allows you to configure settings relating to the IEEE 802 1X networking protocol Panasonic KX UT248 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance IEEE802 1X Settings Network IEEE802 1X Settings Enable IEEE802 1X OYes No Ethernet Port Setti Beer IEEE802 1X Authentication IEEE802 1X Settings HTTP Client Settings Authentication Protocol EAP MD5 Detection Authentication Password The phone reboots automatically if you modify this page s parameter Ge 4 3 3 1 IEEE802 1X Settings Enable IEEE802 1X Description Selects whether to use the IEEE 802 1X protocol Note e You should specify Yes for only one of LLDP VLAN or IEEE8021X e f Yes is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X gt VLAN gt LLDP Therefore if Yes is specified for both VLAN and LLDP the VLAN related settings are used Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Configuration File Reference IEEE8021X_ENABLE Page 198 86 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 3 IEEE802 1X Settings KX UT248 only 4 3 3 2 IEEE802 1X Authentication Authentication Protocol Description Specifies the authentication method used with the IEEE 802 1X protocol Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable VLAN is set to Yes Value Range es EAP MD5
16. Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings BUSY_TONE_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of the busy tone Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 BUSY_TONE_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether the busy tone is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 BUSY_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of busy tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 500 440 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 138 REORDER_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 139 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 215 5 5 2 Tone Settings REORDER_TONE_GAIN Value Format Integer Desc
17. Carl OI Brien Dorothy Parker aooo Record ID Unique ID 1 65535 Tab Name up to 24 characters Tab Nick name up to 24 characters Tab Phone number up to 32 digits Tab Phone number up to 32 digits do Tab Phone number up to 32 digits Tab Phone number up to 32 digits amp Tab d Phone number up to 32 digits Tab Ringtone 1 32 6 1 1 Import Export Operation The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units and how to export phonebook data from units to a PC through the Web user interface For details about the settings see 4 6 6 Import Phonebook or 4 6 7 Export Phonebook To import phonebook data 1 Click the Telephone tab and then click Import Phonebook 2 In File Name enter the full path to the file that you want to import or click Browse to select the phonebook data file that you want to import 3 Click Import To export the phonebook data 1 Click the Telephone tab and then click Export Phonebook 2 Click Export 274 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel 3 On the Now Processing File Data screen click the text HERE in the displayed message or wait until File Download window appears Note Depending on the security settings of your Web browser pop up menus might be blocked If the file cannot be exported successfully try the export operatio
18. Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 202 STUN Server Port Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_PORT Page 202 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings This screen allows you to configure the NAPT Network Address Port Translation settings If the unit is connected behind a router that uses NAT NAPT to translate between private and global IP addresses VoIP Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 91 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings packets might be blocked by the router depending on the SIP server To avoid this problem this setting is required For details see 1 1 7 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Static NAPT Settings Web Port Close Network Global IP Address Global IP Address Null Disable Even if you enter a value for this setting if Global Address Detection is enabled the detected global IP address will be used Global Address Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line WW 2 Application Settings Line 2 OYes No Line 3 OYes No Line 4 OYes No External RTP Port jo Jo 0 0 0 jo 0 0 0 0 fo Un 0 0 LES Channel 1 25 e SS P d DU L 0 0 0 0 0 1024 49150 Even Number Only 0 Disable Set a value for all fields or set all fie
19. The inter digit timer expires gt see Inter digit Timeout in 4 6 1 1 Call Control in the Web user interface or INTDIGIT TIM in 5 5 1 Call Control Settings in the configuration file The user presses ENTER or the key The call is initiated after going off hook pre dial Dial Plan Example The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx Complete Match Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 211 911 and so on the call is made immediately Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e If the dialed phone number is 2123456789 5987654321 and so on the call is made immediately Partial Match when the dial plan contains Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 01254 012556 and so on the call is made after the inter digit timer expires Partial Match when the dial plan does not contain Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 281 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No
20. 9 1 Revision History 9 1 1 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 025 New Contents e 5 7 1 Call Control Settings VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE Page 246 e 5 7 1 Call Control Settings HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n Page 246 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_REQURI_PORT_n Page 260 Changed Contents e 1 2 1 1 Resetting to Factory Default Factory Setting Page 29 e 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Network Settings IP Reset Page 30 e 3 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands Page 56 5 5 2 Tone Settings HOLD_TONE_TIMING Page 220 298 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 9 1 2 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 080 9 1 2 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 080 New Contents e 4 3 7 Application Settings Page 94 e 4 5 4 1 Quality of Service QoS RTCP Packet QoS DSCP Page 117 es 4 5 4 4 DTMF DTMF Relay Page 119 e 4 6 8 Application Settings Page 143 5 3 6 Management Server Settings ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE Page 189 ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 189 ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT Page 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID Page 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS Page 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE Page 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE Page 191 UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT Page 191 e 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Page 228 5 6 2 RTP Settings DSCP_RTCP_n Page 235 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Se
21. Default Value Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 SIP_FOVR_MAX_n 5 7 2 SIP Settings Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_MAX 1 SIP_FOVR_MAX 2 SIP_FOVR_MAX 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum number of servers including the first normal server used in the fail over process Value Range 1 4 Default Value 2 SIP_REFRESHER_n Parameter Name Example SIP_REFRESHER_1 SIP_REFRESHER_2 SIP_REFRESHER_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to add the refresher parameter for Session Expire in SIP INVITE Value Range 0 2 0 Do not add the refresher parameter 1 Add the refresher parameter with the value UAS 2 Add the refresher parameter with the value UAC Default Value 0 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n Parameter Name Example SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA 2 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record Value Range e Enable DNS SRV lookup N Disable DNS SRV lookup Note e If set to Y the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server e If set to N the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP
22. Description Specifies the password used to authenticate an ACS making a Connection Request to the CPE Note When the CON_REQ USER_ID parameter is specified an empty string for this parameter is not allowed Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether or not the CPE can use STUN This applies only to the use of STUN in association with the ACS to allow UDP Connection Requests Value Range e Y Enable N Disable Default Value N ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the host name or IP address of the STUN server for the CPE to send Binding Requests Note e This setting is available only when ANNEX CG STUN_ENABLE is set to Y e Ifthe value for this setting is an empty string and ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE is set to Y the CPE must use the address of the ACS extracted from the host portion of the ACS URL Value Range Max 256 characters Default Value Empty string Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 189 5 3 6 Management Server Settings ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server for the CPE to send Binding Requests Note e This setting is available only when A
23. 5060 1 65535 5060 11 6555 5060 1 1 65535 Qutbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server Address Outbound Proxy Server Port 5060 1 65535 SIP Service Domain Service Domain SIP Source Port Source Port 5060 1024 49151 SIP Authentication Authentication ID Authentication Password 4 5 2 1 Phone Number Phone Number a Description Note Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server s When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number you should use the SIP URI setting Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference PHONE_NUMBER_n Page 247 106 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x SIP URI Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip user example com Note When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number you should use this setting e InaSIP URI the user part user in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value
24. Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 143 XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started from the unit s menu to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 144 XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call to check for XML data Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 229 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 144 XMLAPP_TALKING_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 144 XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 144 XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL Value Format String Description
25. Description Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record Value Range e Yes es No Note If you select Yes the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server If you select No the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n Page 255 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using UDP Note This setting is available only when Enable DNS SRV lookup is set to Yes Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _udp Configuration File Reference SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n Page 256 110 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x SRV lookup Prefix for TCP Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using TCP Note This setting is available only when Enable DNS SRV lookup is set to Yes Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _tcp Configuration File Reference SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n Page 256 4 5 2 8 Transport Protocol of SI
26. Web User Interface Reference Standard File URL Page 149 CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 181 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 500 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt scheme gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 128 characters lt password gt must be less than 128 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt scheme gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 245 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version s If this URL ends with slash MO
27. Configuration File Reference USER_PASS Page 170 New Password Description Value Range Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Default Value 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Not stored Note When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time after clicking OK on the authentication dialog box the Change User Password screen is displayed automatically to make the user set a password Configuration File Reference USER_PASS Page 170 Confirm New Password Description Value Range Specifies the same password that you entered in New Password for confirmation 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note e This value must be the same as the value entered in New Password Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference USER_PASS Page 170 4 4 4 Web Server Settings This screen allows you to change the Web server settings Panasonic KX UT136 Status Web Port Close System Web Server Settings I Time Adjust Settings Web Server Port Port Close Timer Administrator Guide Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Web Server Settings Web Server Settings o 180 1024 49151 30 minute s 1 1440 Save Document Version 2013 03 4 4 4 Web Server Settings 4 4
28. DIAL_PLAN_n Page 242 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Description Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in Dial Plan Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 129 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes calls will be made even if the dialed number does not match the dial formats specified in Dial Plan i e dial plan filtering is disabled If you select No calls will not be made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial formats specified in Dial Plan i e dial plan filtering is enabled Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n Page 243 4 6 2 3 Call Features Block Caller ID Description Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number to the called party Note e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Block Anonymous Call Description Selects whether to reject incoming calls that do not show the caller s number Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No 130 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Do Not Disturb Description Selects whether to enable the Do Not Disturb feature for incoming calls
29. Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 146 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT1 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 231 5 5 6 XML Application Settings XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT2 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT3 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT4 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N XML_INITIATE_KEY_FWDDND Value Format
30. Indicates the factory default value of the parameter Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer Phone User Interface Reference Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming Web User Interface Reference Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming 5 2 2 Characters Available for String Values Unless noted otherwise in Value Range only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values Unicode characters can also be used in some parameter values 168 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 1 Login Account Settings Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table 5 3 System Settings 5 3 1 Login Account Settings ADMIN_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the Administrator account Value Range Max 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value admin ADMIN_PASS Value Format String Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value
31. Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_URI_n Page 247 4 5 2 2 SIP Server Registrar Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n Page 250 Registrar Server Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n Page 250 Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n Page 249 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 107 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x Proxy Server Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_PORT_n Page 249 Presence Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n Page 257 Presence Serve
32. Telephone Maintenance VoIP Settings Line 1 Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP 0 RTCP Packet QoS DSCP 0 63 0 0 63 Statistical Information RTCP Enable RTCP Interval Maximum Delay Minimum Delay OYes No 5 seconds 5 65535 20 Gan 2 ma 2 mn Initial Delay DTMF Type DTMF Relay Outband O Inband OYes No Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 Ges ONo CODEC Preferences Enable Yes ONo G722 Priority A 1 255 nable Yes ONo 4 5 4 1 Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference DSCP_RTP_n Page 235 RTCP Packet QoS DSCP Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 117 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x Configuration File Reference DSCP_RTCP_n Page 235 4 5 4 2 Statistical Information RTCP Enable Description Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP Real Time Transport Control Protocol For details refer to RFC 3550 Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference RTCP_ENABLE_n Page 238 RTCP Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between RTCP pack
33. 2 1 Pre provisioning 2 1 1 What is Pre provisioning 34 To perform pre provisioning you must set the IP address of a TFTP server to the DHCP server option 66 so that the unit can acquire the TFTP server address When the unit starts up and no configuration has been applied it will automatically acquire the address of the TFTP server and download the configuration file For details about the configuration file see 2 2 3 Configuration File For details about the settings that can be configured with the configuration files and how to specify the settings see Section 5 Configuration File Programming Phone system dealer Preset Pre provisioning Pre provisioning data Factory defaults Factory defaults Pre provisioning can aid the installation process by allowing phone system dealers to configure beforehand the minimum settings required to operate the unit For example phone system dealers can store on the TFTP server a configuration file that contains only the URL of a server where another configuration file is stored This second configuration file contains settings configured specifically for the usage environment of the user The user will be able to start using the unit by just connecting it to the network Pre provisioning is performed only once after the unit has been shipped Once any configuration such as pre provisioning provisioning or Web user interface programming has been applied pre provisioning will not be per
34. Boolean Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N XML_INITIATE_KEY_FLASH Value Format Boolean 232 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 6 1 Codec Settings Description Specifies whether to activate the XML application or operate normally when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode Value Range Y Activate XML application N Normal operation Default Value N XML_ERROR_INFORMATION Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to display an error when an error occurs while operating an XML application Value Range Y Error displayed N Error not displayed Default Value H XML_HTTPD_PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the destination port number for XML feature connection requests Value Range 1024 49151 Default Value 6666 5 6 VoIP Settings 5 6 1 Codec Settings CODEC_G711_REQ Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to set PCMU as a codec selection automatically when the codec is set to any codec selection other than PCMU Value Range e 0 Do not set PCMU e 1 Set PCMU Default Value 1 Doc
35. Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_ADD_RPORT_n Page 259 4 5 2 13 Security Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter Description Selects whether to enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter for the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the unit receives SIP messages only from the source addresses stored in the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server and not from other addresses However if Outbound Proxy Server Address in 4 5 2 3 Outbound Proxy Server is specified the unit also receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound proxy server 114 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 3 VoIP Settings Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n Page 264 4 5 3 VoIP Settings This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance VoIP Settings VoIP RTP Settings ES RTP Packet Time 20 milliseconds Line 4 Line Minimum RTP Port Number 16000 1024 48750 Even Number Only Line 3 Maximum RTP Port Number 20000 1424 49150 Even Number Only Line 4 m VolP Settings Telephone event Payload Type 101 96 127 Line 1 Line 3 Line 4 4 5
36. 0 No tone Default Value 440 480 Configuration File Reference RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ Page 216 Tone Timings 138 Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of ringback tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 2000 3940 Configuration File Reference RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING Page 217 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 4 Tone Settings 4 6 4 4 Stutter Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE4 FRQ Page 213 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using up to 22 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any
37. 1 24 v v Page 136 KX UT248 only Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 69 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Tone Settings Dial Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 136 Tone Timings v Page 137 Busy Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 137 Tone Timings v Page 138 Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 138 Tone Timings v Page 138 Stutter Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 139 Tone Timings v Page 139 Reorder Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 139 Tone Timings v Page 140 Telephone Telephone Settings Key Click Tone v v Page 140 SCH Extension PIN v v Page 141 Number Matching Lower v Page 141 Digit Number Matching Upper v Page 141 Digit Import Import Phonebook File Name v v Page 142 Phonebook Export Export Phonebook v v Page 142 Phonebook Application Application Bootup URL URL v Page 143 SES Application initial URL URL v Page 144 Incoming call URL URL v Page 144 Talking URL URL v Page 144 Making call URL URL v Page 144 Call log URL URL v Page 145 Idling URL URL v Page 145 Network Phone Book URL v Page 145 URL Network Phone Book Authentication ID v Page 145 SE NEUSTEN Authentication Password Page 146 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting
38. 100 100 100 0 the unit will not play the tone for 100 ms play it for 100 ms stop it for 100 ms and then play it continuously e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 0 Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE1_TIMING Page 212 4 6 4 2 Busy Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_FRQ Page 214 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 137 4 6 4 Tone Settings Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of busy tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 500 440 Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_TIMING Page 215 4 6 4 3 Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of ringback tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000
39. 157 179 Proxy Server Address 90 107 Proxy Server Port 90 108 Proxy Server Settings 89 Q Quality of Service QoS 113 117 R Recommended Environment 22 REDIALKEY_CALLLOG_ENABLE 209 Refresh Button 25 73 76 REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n 251 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n 251 REG_RTX_INTVL_n 261 Registrar Server Address 107 Registrar Server Port 107 Related Documentation 2 Reliability of Provisional Responses 113 257 Reorder Tone 139 REORDER_TONE_FRQ 215 REORDER_TONE_GAIN 216 REORDER_TONE_RPT 216 REORDER_TONE_TIMING 216 Reset 29 Administrator Guide 307 Index Reset to Defaults 152 Reset Web ID Password 23 57 Reset Web Settings 30 Reset Web Settings Button 152 Resource List URI 129 RESOURCELIST_URI_n 244 Restart 153 Restart Button 153 Result Messages 26 Resync Interval 151 RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE 245 RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n 241 RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ 216 RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN 217 RINGBACK_TONE_RPT 217 RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING 217 Ringing Tone 138 RINGING_OFF_SETTING_ENABLE 209 Root Certificate 44 200 201 Router Setup 29 RTCP Enable 118 RTCP Interval 118 RTCP Packet 00S DSCP 117 RTCP_ENABLE_n 238 RTCP_INTVL_n 236 RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n 239 RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup 29 RTP Packet QoS DSCP 117 RTP Packet Time 115 RTP Settings 29 115 164 235 RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n 239 RTP_PORT_MAX 237 RTP_PORT_MIN 237 RTP_PTIME 238 S Save Button 25 26 SDP_USER_ID_n 262 Secondary DNS Server 19 75 79 8
40. 289 Update Type 147 URL 143 144 145 USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_n 259 USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n 258 USER_DNS1_ADDR 194 USER_DNS2_ADDR 194 USER_ID 170 USER_PASS 170 Using 2 Types of Configuration Files 39 Using 3 Types of Configuration Files 39 V Version Information 72 VLAN Settings 84 VLAN_ENABLE 196 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE 196 VLAN_ID_PC 197 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE 197 VLAN_PRI_PC 197 VM_NUMBER_n 242 VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE 205 Voice Mail Access Number 127 VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE 246 VolP 65 VoIP Settings 115 117 163 233 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x 117 VoIP Status 75 76 294 Administrator Guide 309 Index VoIP Tab 65 104 W Web Language 21 95 Web Port 22 25 99 Web Port Close Button 22 24 25 Web Server Port 99 Web Server Settings 98 99 Web User Interface Programming 21 59 Web User Interface Setting List 60 Web User Interface Window 24 X XML Application Settings 163 228 XML_ERROR_INFORMATION 233 XML_HTTPD_PORT 233 XML_INITIATE_KEY_FLASH 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_FWDDND 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT1 231 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT2 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT3 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT4 232 XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL 230 XMLAPP_ENABLE 228 XMLAPP_IDLING_URL 230 XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL 229 XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL 229 XMLAPP_LDAP_URL 231 XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID 231 XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS 231 XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL 230 XMLAPP_START_URL 229 XMLAPP_TALKING_ URL 230 XMLAPP_USERID 228 XMLAPP_USERPASS 229 310 Administrator Guide Document V
41. 4 7 1 Firmware Maintenance The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures Firmware Update Enable Disable e Ina configuration file add the line FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Y e In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then select Yes for Enable Firmware Update Firmware Version Number e Ina configuration file specify the new version number in FIRM_VERSION Automatic Update e Ina configuration file add the line FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Y e In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then select Automatic for Update Type Firmware Server URL e Ina configuration file specify the URL in FIRM_FILE PATH Inthe Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then enter the URL in Firmware File URL Configuration Parameter Example By setting the parameters as shown in the following example the unit will automatically download the firmware file from the specified URL http firm example com firm 01 050 fw and perform the update operation if the currently used firmware version is older than 01 050 Example FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE Y FIRM _VERSION 01 050 FIRM _ UPGRADE AUTO Y FIRM FILE PATH http firm example com firm 01 050 fw 7 3 Executing Firmware Update After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file the firmware will be updated whe
42. 48 SP PHONE Sending Level Narrow Band 50 SP PHONE Sending Level Wiede Band 52 SP PHONE Receiving Level Narrow Band 54 SP PHONE Receiving Level Wide Band 56 Reserved 58 Ringer Volume Level For example the following line in a configuration file would change the Handset Receiving Level Narrow Band gain 3 decibels ADJDATA_GAIN 0000FDOO 00 is the equivalent of fifty Os Default Value Empty string ADJDATA_ATT KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 only 226 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the switching parameter for using the handset to make a call Value Range 0 Regular parameter 1 Extended parameter Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 5 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Default Value 5 5 5 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx Value Format String Description Specifies a particular Facility Action for the flexible button No facility action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid Note e If this parameter is specified FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx should be an empty string Value Range Only the following values are available X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DN X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_HEADSET X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CONTACT X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP Default
43. 5dB 04 4dB 03 3dB 02 2dB 01 1dB 00 No change FF 1dB FE 2dB FD 3dB FC 4dB FB 5dB FA 6dB Except Sidetone amp Ringer Volume Level 06 6dB 05 5dB 04 4dB 03 3dB 02 2dB 01 1dB 00 No change FF 1dB FE 2dB FD 3dB FC 4dB FB 5dB FA 6dB Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 225 5 5 4 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings Note e Itis necessary to specify 2 digits for each of the 30 acoustic settings e a total of 60 digits in succession Even if you are not changing a value you must enter 00 The digit order offset of each setting is as follows 00 Handset Sending Level Narrow Band 02 Handset Sending Level Wide Band 04 Handset Receiving Level Narrow Band 06 Handset Receiving Level Wide Band 08 Handset Sidetone Level Narrow Band 10 Handset Sidetone Level Wide Band 12 EHS Sending Level Narrow Band 14 EHS Sending Level Wide Band 16 EHS Receiving Level Narrow Band 18 EHS Receiving Level Wide Band 20 EHS Sidetone Level Narrow Band 22 EHS Sidetone Level Wide Band 24 Headset Sending Level Narrow Band 26 Headset Sending Level Wide Band 28 Headset Receiving Level Narrow Band 30 Headset Receiving Level Wide Band 32 Headset Sidetone Level Narrow Band 34 Headset Sidetone Level Wide Band 36 Reserved 38 Reserved 40 Reserved 42 Reserved 44 Reserved 46 Reserved
44. Create the Panasonic directory just under the HTTP root directory of the provisioning server File name of configuration files Store the following configuration files in the Panasonic directory Contains the common settings for the 2 units ConfigCommon cfg Contains the settings unique to each unit Config0080F0111111 cfg Config0080F0222222 cfg Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 43 2 2 6 Encryption To set up the provisioning server 1 Connect the units to the network and turn them on a The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg http prov example com Panasonic ConfigO080F01 11111 cfg b The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg http prov example com Panasonic ConfigQ080F0222222 cfg Example Provisioning Direction from the Server The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server directing the units to perform provisioning The text check sync is specified for CFG_RESYNC_FROM_ SIP NOTIFY sip 1234567890 sip example com SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP xxx xxx xxx xxx 5060 branch abcdef ghijkl From sip prov sip example com To sip 1234567890 sip example com Date Thu 1 Jan 2009 01 01 01 GMT Call ID 123456 1234567912345678 CSeq 1 NOTIFY Contact sip xxx xxx xxx xxx 5060 Event check syn
45. Default Value 1 Web User Interface Reference HTTP Version Page 88 HTTP_USER_AGENT Value Format String Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP requests Value Range Max 40 characters Note An empty string is not allowed If mac is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the units MAC address in upper case If MODELY is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name e H fwver is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Web User Interface Reference HTTP User Agent Page 88 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate 200 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 6 Time Adjust Settings Value Range 0 No verification of root certificate e 1 Simple verification of root certificate e 2 Precise verification of root certificate Note e If set to 0 the verification of the root certificate is disabled e f setto 1 the verification of the root certificate is enabled In this case the validity of the certificate s date certificate s chain and the c
46. KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Resource List URI Page 129 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 1 Call Control Settings CW_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example CW_ENABLE_1 CW_ ENABLE 2 CW_ENABLE 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether automatic call waiting is enabled Value Range e Y Enable Call Waiting e N Disable Call Waiting Default Value Y RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the volume is returned to its default setting after each call Value Range e Volume returns to the default setting after each call N Volume does not change after each call Default Value N FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE Value Format Boolean Description Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a conversation Value Range e Y Terminate N EFA Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Flash Recall Button Page 125 FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE Value Format String Description Specifies the type of signal sent when sending a flash hook event Value Range e Signal e flashhook Default Value Signal Web User
47. Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected No for this setting e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No 4 6 2 4 Call Forward Unconditional Enable Call Forward Description Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified destination Note If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting If you have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server but the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 4 6 2 1 Call Control or through configuration file programming gt see FWD _DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n in 5 7 1 Call Control Settings If you
48. Result Message Description Applicable Screens Failed Invalid File The operation failed because e The imported UTF 16 text file has an invalid BOM Byte order Mark 4 6 6 Import Phonebook e The firmware file is corrupted or invalid 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update Failed File Size Error The operation failed because e The size of the imported phonebook is too large 4 6 6 Import Phonebook e The size of the firmware file is insufficient 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update Failed Busy The operation failed because s When attempting to import export the phonebook data the connection with the unit has been disconnected 4 6 6 Import Phonebook 4 6 7 Export Phonebook Memory Full The operation failed because e When attempting to import the phonebook data the total number of phonebook entries including the existing entries exceeds the limit of up to 100 for the KX UT113 500 for the KX UT123 KX UT 133 KX UT 136 KX UT248 entries 4 6 6 Import Phonebook No Data The operation failed because e The imported phonebook file contains no valid phonebook entries 4 6 6 Import Phonebook Nophonebook entry is registered in the export source the unit 4 6 7 Export Phonebook 1 Failed Transfer Failure may not be displayed depending on your Web browser Notice Do not click the navigation buttons of your Web browser or open a new window to displa
49. Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 145 XMLAPP_IDLING_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string 230 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Web User Interface Reference URL Page 145 XMLAPP_LDAP_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the phonebook is accessed to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference URL Page 145 XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the network phonebook server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 145 XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the networkphonebook server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space
50. This section explains phone number settings dial plan and phonebook import export function Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 271 6 1 Phonebook Import and Export 6 1 Phonebook Import and Export 272 This section explains how to import and export phonebook data Phonebook data of the unit includes names and phone numbers Phonebook data on the unit can be exported edited with editor tools and imported again In addition phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows Editing Phonebook Data on a PC The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software For details about the operation see 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel You can export the phonebook data to the PC edit the exported file using appropriate software and then import it into the unit Microsoft Excel Importing Address Book Data from a PC You can import address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook messaging and collaboration client into the unit First export address book data from the e mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel edit it as necessary and then import the exported data into the unit For details about the operation see 6 1 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook Phonebook data Microsoft Microsoft Excel Outlook Ba
51. VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE Page 246 HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n Page 246 SIP Settings SIP_USER_AGENT Page 246 PHONE_NUMBER_n Page 247 SIP_URI_n Page 247 LINE_ENABLE_n Page 248 PROFILE ENABLEn Page 248 SIP_AUTHID_n Page 248 SIP PASS on Page 249 SIP_SRC_PORT_n Page 249 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n Page 249 SIP_PRXY_PORT_n Page 249 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n Page 250 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n Page 250 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n Page 250 REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n Page 251 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n Page 251 SIP_SESSION_TIME_n Page 251 SIP_SESSION METHOD n Page 251 DSCP_SIP_n Page 252 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 165 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_n Page 252 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_n Page 252 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_n Page 253 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_n Page 253 SIP_TIMER TL oni Page 253 SIP_TIMER T2_n Page 253 SIP_TIMER TA n Page 254 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n Page 254 SIP_FOVR_MAX n Page 255 SIP_REFRESHER_n Page 255 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n Page 255 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n Page 256 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n Page 256 SIP_100REL ENABLE n Page 256 SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n Page 257 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n Page 257 SIP_PRSNC ADDR_n Page 257 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n Page 258 SIP_2NDPRSNC ADDR_n Page 258 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_n Page 258 USE_DEL_REG OPEN o Page 258 USE_DEL_REG CLOSE on Page 259 PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_n Page 259 SIP_ADD_RPORT_n Page 259 SIP_REQ
52. Web Language Administrator Password Change User Password Web Server Settings Time Adjust Settings Enable Synchronization by NTP Synchronization Interval Yes ONo 43200 seconds 10 86400 NTP Server Address Time Zone GMT x Enable DST OYes No DST Offset 60 minute s 0 720 Month March zi Day of Week Second Sunday ei Time 1 120 minute s 0 1439 End Day and Time of DST Month October Day of Week Second Sunday x Time 120 minute s 0 1439 Save 4 4 5 1 Synchronization Enable Synchronization by NTP Description Selects whether to enable the unit to automatically adjust its clock according to the time information provided by an NTP server Value Range e Yes e No Note Even if you select Yes this feature will not function properly if the NTP server address setting is invalid Default Value Yes Synchronization Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between synchronizations with the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 43200 100 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings Configuration File Reference TIME_QUERY_INTVL Page 202 4 4 5 2 Time Server NTP Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration F
53. adminpass Web User Interface Reference e Current Password Page 96 e New Password Page 96 Confirm New Password Page 97 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 169 5 3 2 System Time Settings USER_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the User account Value Range Max 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value user USER_PASS Value Format String Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string only before a user accesses the Web user interface for the first time Web User Interface Reference e Current Password Page 97 e New Password Page 98 e Confirm New Password Page 98 5 3 2 System Time Settings TIME_ZONE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC GMT in minutes 170 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 2 System Time Settings Value Range 720 780 Note Only the following values are available 720 GMT 12 00 660 GMT 11 00 600 GMT 10 00 540 GMT 09 00 480 GMT 08 00 420 G
54. e PEAP Default Value EAP MD5 Configuration File Reference IEEE8021X_AUTH_PRTCL Page 198 Authentication ID Description Specifies the authentication ID required for IEEE 802 1X authentication Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable VLAN is set to Yes Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference IEEE8021X_USER_ID Page 198 Authentication Password Description Specifies the authentication password used for IEEE 802 1X authentication Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable VLAN is set to Yes Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference IEEE8021X_USER_PASS Page 199 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 87 4 3 4 HTTP Client Settings 4 3 4 HTTP Client Settings This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of your phone system and download configuration files Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance HTTP Client Settings Network HTTP Client Settings Basic Network Settings HTTP Version HTTP 1 0 OHTTP 1 1 Ethernet Port Settings f HP cientsetings HTTP User Agent Panasonic_ MODEL fwer mac Global Address HT
55. in milliseconds of the hold alarm using up to 10 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 120 14880 CW_TONE1_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of call waiting tone 1 using 2 whole numbers separated by acomma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 425 CW_TONE1_ GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of call waiting tone 1 218 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 CW_TONE1_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether call waiting tone 1 is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 CW_TONE1_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of call waiting tone 1 using up to 10 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 120 120 120 120 120 14400 HOLD _TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Descripti
56. the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled The option tag 100rel will be added to the Supported header of the INVITE message and to the Require header of the 1xx provisional message If you select No the option tag 100rel will not be used Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n Page 256 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received For details refer to RFC 4028 Value Range 0 60 65535 0 Disable Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 113 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference SIP_SESSION_TIME_n Page 251 4 5 2 12 NAT Identity Keep Alive Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information Note e This setting is available only when Transport Protocol is set to UDP Value Range 0 10 300 0 Disable Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_n Page 259 Supports Rport RFC 3581 Description Selects whether to add the rport parameter to the top Via header field value of requests generated For details refer to RFC 3581
57. 1 Phone Number ass ne edd E EE SEENEN 106 Phone Number 106 SIP leede een 107 4 5 2 2 elle 107 ee 107 Registr r Server E 107 tere eege 107 Proxy Server POM sataoen andina PEDIRETDERRLPERLEHEUIERULTEREBEDBEREEEFPILERFELNEHDELBERSIERERTELLEN ELTERN 108 Presence Server Address anna ee 108 Presence Server Port 108 4 5 2 3 Outbound Proxy Server eebe Ee 108 Outbound Proxy Server Addiess 2 nad 108 Outbound Proxy Server Port EE 108 4 5 2 4 SIP Service DOMAIN 20 0 0 cece cece cece cece cae e cea e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeess 109 Service Domain cccccecccecceecceecceecceeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenseeeneetas 109 4 5 2 5 SIP Source POM HARRRREFRRFRREFRFFRERUFRERPEREFFFPELRFRELBFUEREFLELFEEEFEEFPERIBERFIPEFFIELERIEUEN EDER de enee 109 SGUS Te ER 109 4 5 2 6 SIP Authentication cccccccccecccceecccceceeeeeeaaaeeaaaeaaeeaaseaaaeeseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Authentication ID 109 Authentication Password 110 4 5 2 7 ONS ne ee ee EE 110 Enable DNS SRV lookup 2 cccccceccee eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaaeeaaaaaea 110 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP ccccccccecccecc cee ceeaeeeaaeeaaaeaaeaeaaeaaeeaaeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeeenes 110 SRV lookup Prefix for TC 111 4 5 2 8 Transport Protocol Of SIP ccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaaeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaaanaas 111 Transport Protocol
58. 3 1 RTP Settings RTP Packet Time Description Selects the interval in milliseconds between transmissions of RTP packets Value Range e 20 e 30 e 40 Default Value 20 Configuration File Reference RTP_PTIME Page 238 Minimum RTP Port Number Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note e If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 25 in 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled e The available channel number varies depending on the type of the unit being used Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 115 4 5 3 VoIP Settings Value Range 1024 48750 even number only Note The value for this setting must be less than or equal to Maximum RTP Port Number 400 Changing this setting may affect the number of simultaneous calls that can be made Therefore when setting this parameter be aware that the maximum number of necessary ports can be calculated as shown below No of lines x No of channels x 2 x 10 No of terminals Default Value 16000 Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MIN Page 237 Maximum RTP Port Number Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 25 in 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port this setting is ignored and the c
59. 4 1 Web Server Settings Web Server Port Description Specifies the port number used by the Web server Value Range 80 1024 49151 Note e You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the port numbers specified for the individual lines in Source Port in 4 5 2 5 SIP Source Port Default Value 80 Note When you change the default value of the port number to a value other than 80 such as 8080 enter the URL for accessing the Web user interface using the following format http 192 168 0 100 8080 192 168 0 100 IP address of the unit Port Close Timer Description Specifies the length of time in minutes to keep the Web port open when there has been no communication between the unit and the PC If the specified length of time elapses without any communication the Web port closes automatically Communication is detected when you click a tab menu item the Save button or by reloading the application or pressing the F5 key Value Range 1 1440 Default Value 30 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 99 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the settings for DST Daylight Saving Time also known as Summer Time Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Time Adjust Settings system
60. Authentication ID v Page 94 SEENEN Authentication Password v Page 95 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level This setting can also be configured through other programming methods phone user interface programming or configuration file programming If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming System Access kl Menu Item Section Title Setting Side Ref U A Web Language Web Language Language v v Page 95 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List 64 Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Administrator Change Administrator Current Password v Page 96 Password Password BEES 7 Page 96 Confirm New Password v Page 97 Change User Change User Password Current Password v Page 97 Base won New Password v Page 98 Confirm New Password v Page 98 Web Server Web Server Settings Web Server Port y Page 99 SST Port Close Timer v Page 99 Time Adjust Synchronization
61. Description Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off for the phone If disabled users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing Value Range e Y Enable Ringing Off setting N Disable Ringing Off setting Default Value H AUTO CALL HOLD Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when a DN button is pressed while having a conversation Value Range e Y Enable Auto Call Hold N Disable Auto Call Hold Default Value Y REDIALKEY_CALLLOG_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the call log is displayed when the Redial button is pressed while on hook Value Range e y Displays outgoing call log by pressing the Redial button N Not display call log by pressing the Redial button Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 209 5 5 1 Call Control Settings Default Value ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether transfer operations are permitted while on hook Value Range Y Enable On hook Transfer e N Disable On hook Transfer Default Value H DISCONNECTION_MODE Value Format Integer Description Selects the tone heard reorder tone or busy tone when a dial operation fails Value Range 1 2 1 Mode ROT 2 Mode2 BT Default Value
62. Description Specifies the type of signal sent when sending a flash hook event Value Range e Signal e flashhook Default Value Signal Configuration File Reference FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE Page 245 Direct Call Pickup Description Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call pickup Value Range Max 4 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT Page 208 4 6 1 2 Call Rejection Phone Numbers 1 30 Description Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from A maximum of 30 phone numbers can be specified Note e You can also configure this setting through the phone user interface If these settings are changed through the phone user interface while being changed through the Web user interface the settings made through the phone user interface will be overwritten by the settings made through the Web user interface Value Range Max 32 characters Note e Even if you specify nonconsecutive fields e g fields 1 5 and 30 they will be rearranged into consecutive fields after you save the settings e 1 2 and 3 e Ifthe phone number contains characters other than 0 9 and the number may not be rejected correctly Default Value Not stored 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specifi
63. FQDN Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 201 5 4 7 STUN Settings Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference NTP Server Address Page 101 TIME_SYNC_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds to resynchronize after having detected no reply from the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 60 TIME_QUERY_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between synchronizations with the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 43200 Web User Interface Reference Synchronization Interval Page 100 5 4 7 STUN Settings STUN_SERV_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference STUN Server Address Page 91 STUN_SERV_PORT 202 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 Web User Interface Reference STUN Server Port Page 91 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 8 Miscellaneous Network Settings STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the
64. French Canadian bs Bosnian ro Romanian e s1 Slovene e sr Serbian e tr Turkish Default Value en US EXTENSION_PIN Value Format String Description Specifies the PIN Personal Identification Number of the extension This is used to lock access to the call log and phonebook list For details refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Default Value 0000000000 Web User Interface Reference Extension PIN Page 141 POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE 224 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the key is treated as a regular dialed digit or a delimiter when dialed as or after the second digit Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 4 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings Value Range e Y istreated as the end of dialing delimiter e N is treated as a regular dialed digit Default Value Y 5 5 4 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings ADJDATA_GAIN Value Format String Description Specifies the gain in decibels of 30 separate acoustic settings Each setting is denoted by a 2 digit hexadecimal number Enter the change in gain from the default value for each setting Enter 00 if you do not want to change the setting Value Range Sidetone Ringer Volume Level 06 6dB 05
65. MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version e If this URL ends with slash sip cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH http host dir becomes CFG_MASTER FILE PATH http host dir sip cfg Default Value Empty string Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Web User Interface Reference Master File URL Page 150 CFG_FILE_KEY1 Value Format String Description Specifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note e Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e1c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte characters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value A unique value is preset to each unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 183 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings CFG_FILE_KEY2 Value Format String Description Specifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note e Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e2c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte ch
66. Matching Lower Digit Number Matching Upper Digit Yes ONo BE KE Save Cancel 4 6 5 1 Telephone Settings Key Click Tone Description Selects whether a tone is heard in response to key presses Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference KEY_PAD_TONE Page 210 140 Administrator Gui de Document Version 2013 03 4 6 6 Import Phonebook Extension PIN Description Specifies the Personal Identification Number PIN of the extension This is used to lock access to the call log and phonebook list For details refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Value Range Max 10 digits Default Value 0000000000 Configuration File Reference EXTENSION_PIN Page 224 Number Matching Lower Digit Description Specifies the minimum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call s caller ID To specify exact matching of entire numbers only specify 0 Value Range 0 15 Default Value 7 Configuration File Reference NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT Page 222 Number Matching Upper Digit Description Specifies the maximum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call s caller ID To specify exact matching of entire numbers only specify 0 Value Range 0 15 Default Value 10 Configuration File Referen
67. Mode 82 LLDP Settings 83 LLDP_ENABLE 204 LLDP_INTERVAL 204 LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC 204 LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC 205 LLDP MED Interval timer 83 LLDP MED Settings 159 204 Local Firmware Update 147 148 289 LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX 175 Login Account Settings 156 169 MAC Address 73 MACRODIGIT_TIM 206 Maintenance 71 Maintenance Tab 71 146 MAINTENANCE_WEB_RESET_ON_STARTUP 186 Making call URL 144 Management Server 151 152 Management Server Authentication 152 Management Server Settings 158 187 Management Server URL 152 Document Version 2013 03 Index Master Configuration File 39 150 182 Master File URL 150 MAX_DELAY_n 236 Maximum Delay 118 Maximum RTP Port Number 116 Microsoft Excel 272 275 Microsoft Outlook 272 277 MIN_DELAY_n 236 Minimum Delay 118 Minimum RTP Port Number 115 Miscellaneous Network Settings 159 203 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings 162 225 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings 164 239 Model 72 Month 102 103 N NAPT 91 NAT 28 91 114 259 NAT Identity 114 NAT Traversal 28 93 National Access Code 125 NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE 207 Network 61 Network Phone Book URL 145 Network Phone Book URL Authentication 145 Network Settings 158 191 Network Status 73 294 Network Tab 61 77 New Password 96 98 No Answer Enable Call Forward 133 No Answer Phone Number 134 No Answer Ring Count 134 NOM_DELAY_n 237 NOTES 2 NTP Server Address 101 NTP_ADDR 201 NUM PLAN PICKUP_DIRECT 208 Number Matchin
68. PORT N E 258 USE E e Bn EE 258 USE DEL REG CLOSE E 259 PORT PUNCH INTV i EE 259 SP ADD PO RE E 259 SIP REQURIC POR E 260 SIP SUBS EXPIRE M E 260 SUERTEN TIL EE 260 REG CAE OK D E 261 SIE P PREFERRED ID E 261 SIP 2 2 27 1 8 GE 261 ADD SEI PHONE Rn ner 262 SOP USER ID En E 262 SUB INTERVAE RATE EE 262 SIPSQUTPRORT ADDR M rinenda eegene ee 262 SIP OU TPROXY PORT Natel 263 SIP IRANSPORT Nielsen een leeren 263 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 15 Table of Contents 16 lk ANM DISPNAME 00 scsicsctconccdatiiectsavcsneddanssauccancsasnecssneiudsiiisdastadadeadectsecadeauaides 263 SIP PN WS eRe EE 264 SIP_ANM HOS UNAME N aa aaa ak EEN 264 SIP DETECT SSAF N EE 264 SIP_ RCV DET HEADER P eeenethdeek eeneg LEEEE ECKE EE gt dee Red 265 SIP_CONTACT_ON ACK mn 265 BV UIA RES EE 265 SIP TIMER Dan en a ge 265 SIP TIMER EE 266 SIP TIMER Pie 266 SIP_TIMER_J EE 266 ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP N ne ee ee ie 267 ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER mn 267 SIP HOLD HDOEDREGEVE N un 267 SIP ADD DIVERSION IV nu aaa nnd 267 SIP RESPONSE CODE BNDe u ne tee 268 SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_ BREET 268 SU OR OIE tec a een et cece eee nee 268 SIP FOV DURATION N EEN 268 SIP ADD ROUTE M EE 269 SIP_403 REG SUB Ria ne 269 6 Useful Telephone Functions ccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeaes 271 6 1 Phonebook Import and Export ecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaseeaeeeeneeeeneeaneeeneaeeeeesseeeneeeees 272 6 1 1 Imp
69. Page 212 DIAL _TONE2_GAIN Page 212 DIAL _TONE2_RPT Page 213 DIAL _TONE2_TIMING Page 213 DIAL _TONE4 FRO Page 213 DIAL _TONE4 GAIN Page 213 DIAL _TONE4 RPT Page 214 DIAL _TONE4 TIMING Page 214 BUSY_TONE_FRQ Page 214 BUSY_TONE_GAIN Page 215 BUSY_TONE_RPT Page 215 BUSY_TONE_TIMING Page 215 REORDER_TONE_FRQ Page 215 REORDER_TONE_GAIN Page 216 REORDER_TONE_RPT Page 216 REORDER_TONE_ TIMING Page 216 RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ Page 216 RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN Page 217 RINGBACK_TONE_RPT Page 217 RINGBACK_TONE_ TIMING Page 217 HOLD ALARM FRO Page 217 HOLD ALARM GAIN Page 218 HOLD ALARM RPT Page 218 HOLD ALARM TIMING Page 218 CW_TONE1_FRQ Page 218 CW_TONE1_GAIN Page 218 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 161 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List 162 Category Parameter Name Ref CW_TONE1_RPT Page 219 CW_TONE1 TIMING Page 219 HOLD _TONE_FRQ Page 219 HOLD _TONE_GAIN Page 219 HOLD _TONE_RPT Page 220 HOLD_TONE_ TIMING Page 220 BELL _ CORE _PATTERN1_TIMING Page 220 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2 TIMING Page 220 BELL CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING Page 221 BELL CORE _PATTERN4_TIMING Page 221 BELL CORE_PATTERN5 TIMING Page 221 Telephone Settings DISPLAY NAME REPLACE Page 222 NUMBER MATCHING LOWER DIGIT Page 222 NUMBER MATCHING UPPER_DIGIT Page 222 DISPLAY DATE PATTERN Page 222 DISPLAY TIME PATTERN Page 223 DEFAULT_LANGUAGE Page 223 EXTENSION GIN Page
70. Preferred Identity header e Nn Do not add the P Preferred Identity header Default Value N SIP_PRIVACY_n Parameter Name Example SIP_PRIVACY_1 SIP_PRIVACY_2 SIP_PRIVACY_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the Privacy header to SIP messages Value Range e Y Add the Privacy header s N Do not add the Privacy header Default Value N Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 261 5 7 2 SIP Settings ADD_USER_PHONE_n Parameter Name Example ADD_USER_PHONE_1 ADD_USER_PHONE_2 ADD_USER_PHONE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add user phone to the SIP URI in SIP messages Value Range Y Add user phone e N Do not add user phone Note e SIP URI example sip 1111 tokyo example com user phone when set to Y sip 1111 tokyo example com when set to N Default Value N SDP_USER_ID_n Parameter Name Example SDP_USER_ID_1 SDP_USER_ID_2 SDP_USER_ID_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the user ID used in the o line field of SDP Value Range Max 32 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n Parameter Name Example SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE 2 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_6 Value Format Integer D
71. System Time Settings Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST Summer Time starts Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday l oo bh AO Default Value Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 102 DST_START_TIME Value Format Integer Description Specifies the start time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Web User Interface Reference Time Page 103 DST_STOP_MONTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the month in which DST Summer Time ends Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range 1 12 Default Value 10 Web User Interface Reference Month Page 103 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 173 5 3 2 System Time Settings DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST Summer Time ends The actual end day is specified in DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK For example to specify the second Sunday specify 2 in this parameter and 0 in the next pa
72. URI v Page 124 Inter digit Timeout v Page 124 Timer for Dial Plan v Page 124 International Call Prefix v Page 124 Country Calling Code v Page 125 National Access Code v Page 125 Default Line for Outgoing v v Page 125 Flash Recall Button v Page 125 Flash Hook Event v Page 126 Direct Call Pickup v Page 126 Call Rejection Phone 1 30 v v Page 126 Numbers 68 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U Call Control Line Call Control Display Name v v Page 127 al Voice Mail Access Number v Page 127 Enable Shared Call v Page 128 Synchronize Do Not Disturb v Page 128 and Call Forward Resource List URI v Page 129 Dial Plan Dial Plan max 1000 v Page 129 columns Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not v Page 129 Match Call Features Block Caller ID Page 130 Block Anonymous Call Page 130 Do Not Disturb Page 131 Call Forward Unconditional Enable Call Forward Page 131 Phone Number Page 132 Busy Enable Call Forward v Page 132 Phone Number Page 133 No Answer Enable Call Forward v v Page 133 Phone Number v v Page 134 Ring Count v v Page 134 Flexible Button Flexible Button Settings Type No 1 24 v v Page 135 EE 33 Parameter No 1 24 v v Page 135 KX UT136 Label Name No
73. Used to seize the line assigned to the DN Off Idle Directory Number button When a call Green on The extension is on a call using arrives at the DN button pressing the button the DN button answers the call Flashing green rapidly The DN extension is receiving an incoming call Notice Flashing green slowly A call is on hold at s Atleast 2 DN buttons must be the DN extension assigned to each line If DN buttons Red on A shared line is in use or on hold are not assigned calls cannot be private made or answered Flashing red slowly A shared line is on hold normal Note The shared line shared call feature is an optional feature and may not be supported on your phone system One Touch Used to access a desired party or system feature using the One Touch Dialing feature u Headset Used to enable or disable talking using the Off Headset off headset Red on Headset on 282 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings Button Description Lamp Indication BLF Used to show the current status of another extension call the extension and transfer calls to it This button can also be used to perform Directed Call Pickup gt see Direct Call Pickup in 4 6 1 1 Call Control in the Web user interface or NUM_PLAN PICKUP_DIRECT in 5 5 1 Call Control Settings in the configuration file Note BLF Busy Lamp Field is an optional feature and may not be supported
74. Value X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DN Web User Interface Reference Type No 1 24 Page 135 FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx Value Format String Description Optional argument associated with the specified Facility Action for the flexible button For details see 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value 1 Web User Interface Reference Parameter No 1 24 Page 135 FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx Value Format String Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 227 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Description Specifies a quick dial destination number to be used for the flexible button Note e If this parameter is specified FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx should be an empty string e This parameter cannot be specified via Web user interface programming Therefore when using Web user programming and configuration file programming in conjunction FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx should be set to X_PANASONIC_I PTEL ONETOUCH Value Range Max 32 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Empty string FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx Value Format String Description Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the flexible button is pressed Value Range Max 10 characters Note e You can use Unicode characters for this setting Default Value For KX UT133 KX UT136
75. Y CODEC_PRIORITYO_1 4 Disable PCMA CODEC_ENABLE1_1 N Enable G726 32K CODEC_ENABLE2_1 CODEC_PRIORITY2_1 2 Enable G729A CODEC_ENABLE3_1 Y CODEC_PRIORITY3_1 I Enable PCMU CODEC_ENABLE4_1 Y CODEC_PRIORITY4_1 mg Setting Narrow band Codecs PCMA G 726 32 and G 729A Codec Settings Disable G722 CODEC_ENABLEO_1 N Enable PCMA CODEC_ENABLE1_1 CODEC_PRIORITY1_1 n1 Enable G726 32K CODEC_ENABLE2_1 CODEC_PRIORITY2_1 IER Enable G729A CODEC_ENABLE3_1 Y CODEC_PRIORITY3_1 SEI Disable PCMU CODEC_ENABLE4_1 N Setting the G 729A Codec Only Codec Settings Disable G722 CODEC_ENABLEO_1 N Disable PCMA CODEC_ENABLE1_1 N Disable G726 32K CODEC_ENABLE2_1 N Enable G729A CODEC_ENABLE3_1 Y CODEC_PRIORITY3_1 WR Ei Disable PCMU CODEC_ENABLE4_1 N Do not set PCMU 48 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 5 2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions CODEC_G711_REQ 0 2 5 2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting An improper description is entered in the first line A configuration file must start with the designated character sequence Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File Comment lines start in the middle of the lines Space characters are inserted in the middle of the setting line A specified value is not in the range a
76. a secondary DNS server If you set both DNS servers the primary DNS server receives priority over the secondary DNS server If the primary DNS server returns no reply the secondary DNS server will be used For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the unit or using the Web user interface see Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit in this section DNS Priority Using Configuration File The setting for DNS server s may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer gt see DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR in 5 4 2 DNS Settings e If the DNS server addresses specified in the configuration file gt see DNS_PRIORITY in 5 4 2 DNS Settings are given priority the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers If a match is not found the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server or the primary secondary DNS servers that were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface e Ifthe DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server or the primary secondary DNS servers that were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface are given priority the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers If a match is not found the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified using the configuration file Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via the
77. a unit requests the configuration file MODEL is replaced by the model name of the unit Standard configuration file Configure settings that are unique to each unit such as the phone number user ID password etc The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the provisioning server and each unit downloads the corresponding standard configuration file Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg Note s When a unit requests the configuration file MAC is replaced by the MAC address of the unit Depending on the situation you can use all 3 types of configuration files and can also use only a standard configuration file The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files Depending on the requirements of your phone system dealer there are a number of ways to use configuration files effectively Using 2 Types of Configuration Files The following table shows an example of using 2 types of configuration files a master configuration file to configure settings common to all units and product configuration files to configure settings common to particular groups Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 39 2 2 4 Downloading Configuration F
78. address or FQDN of the SIP presence server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Address Page 108 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 257 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1 SIP_PRSNC_PORT 2 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_ e Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Port Page 108 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR 2 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary presence server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP presence server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n Para
79. an Expires header to REGISTER adds an expires parameter to the Contact header Value Range e Add Expires Header N Do not add Expires Header Default Value Y SIP_HOLD_HOLDRECEIVE_n Parameter Name Example SIP_HOLD_HOLDRECEIVE 1 SIP_HOLD HOLDRECEIVE 2 SIP_HOLD_HOLDRECEIVE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to allow re INVITE for calls on hold Value Range Enable SIP Hold Receive e N Disable SIP Hold Receive Default Value Y SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n Parameter Name Example SIP_ADD_DIVERSION 1 SIP_ADD DIVERSION 2 SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to add Diversion header information Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 267 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range 0 2 0 Do not add Diversion header information 1 Use own diversion information only for the Diversion header 2 Add diversion information to existing Diversion header Default Value SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND Value Format Integer Description Selects the response code when a call is received in Do Not Disturb mode Value Range 400 699 Default Value 403 SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT Value Format Integer Description Selects the response code when a call is rejected Value Range 400 699 Defaul
80. ax a amp Tor Look in dJi PhoneBook A Name Date modified 4 MyRecent tebgokisv an 3 Documents Desktop A My Documents A HS My Computer A File name g eps My Network Places Fiesoftype aries i 4 On the Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 window click Next ereer Le e The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the data type that best describes your data Original data type Choose the file type that best describes your data Delimited Fixed width Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row 1 File origin Windows ANSI Preview of file D Users YIT Desktop PhoneBook Phonebook tsv Aaron MacDowel012340011 Barbara Nicol1s012340022 Carl O Brien012340033 Dorothy Parker012340044 Tskkkk J TE k Note Regardless of what is selected for File origin the file will be processed normally if the format is appropriate 5 On the Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 window select Tab for Delimiters and then click Next Text Import Wizard Step 2 oF 3 ea This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below EE E Treat
81. com Note e When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number you should use this setting e InaSIP URI the user part user in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 247 5 7 2 SIP Settings Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference SIP URI Page 107 LINE_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example LINE_ENABLE_1 LINE_ENABLE 2 LINE_ENABLE_6 Value Format String Description Specifies whether a line is enabled or disabled Note e Even when this parameter is enabled if the PROFILE ENABLEn parameter is disabled the line will be disabled Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Enabled PROFILE_ENABLEn Parameter Name Example PROFILE ENABLE1 PROFILE ENABLE2 PROFILE _ENABLE6 Value Format String Description Specifies whether a line is enabled or disabled Note e Even when this parameter is enabled if the LINE_ENABLE_n parameter is disabled the line will be disabled Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Enabled SIP_AUTHID_n 248 Parameter Name Example SIP_AUTHID_1 SIP_AUTHID_2 SIP_AUTHID_6 Value F
82. e EE 221 Telephone Te CG 222 DISPLAY e 222 NUMBER_MATCHING LOWER DIGIT cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaees 222 NUMBER IMATCHING UP PERL DISIT gegen eseou eeeg ee 222 DISPLAY_DATE_PATTERN 2 ee ege tree 222 DISPLAY _ TIME PATTERN eege eene 223 RR Ei ee EE 223 EXTENSION ee ree rere ree eee ae er eee ee ee eee 224 POUND KEY JDEUIMIMER ENABLE ege ege ee dee eege ege dee 224 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings 0 ccccsess ccccccccseenessesncceeeeeesessssececccenseneseeseciee 225 ADJIDATA GAIN WEE 225 ADJDATA_ATT KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 only 226 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 227 FLEX BUTTON FACILITY ACX E 227 FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGXKX en ned 227 PLER BUTTON QUER DAB nee 227 FLEX BUTTON LABELX er nee ege 228 XML Application Settings nn nnnnnn nn 228 XMLAPP ENABLE use hen ie 228 II E 228 PIMILAIPP Eegeregie ees eege 229 XMLAPP START ee 229 AMLAPP INITIAL URL 2 2 0 0 een elta 229 AMLAPPSINGOMINSZURL an see ee ea 229 XMLAPP_TALKING_URL 22 22 EE gege ee 230 XMLAPP MAKECALL URE EE 230 EE e E ORR EE 230 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 13 Table of Contents XMLAPP IDLING tege EE EE EENS 230 Ee EG EEN EE CIE edietetrtu eet eege EEN XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS eege dee deeg 231 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFTA oo ccccccsccccssssescssscsesecssscsucecscsecsssssesesststeesasecseassesenstenees 231 XML INITIATE REN SOP U2 een
83. e For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming see DIAL_PLAN_n and DIAL PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE_n in 5 7 1 Call Control Settings Available Values for the Dial Plan Field The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format and what the characters mean Element Available Value Description String 0 9 lt gt You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of S s T t X x the characters listed as available values Digit 0 9 Example 123 If the dialed phone number is 123 the call is made immediately Wildcard X X Example 12xxxxx If the dialed phone number is 12 followed by any 5 digit number the call is made immediately Range Example 123 If the dialed phone number is either one of 1 2 or 3 the call is made immediately Subrange Example 1 5 If the dialed phone number is 1 2 3 4 or 5 the call is made immediately e A subrange is only valid for single digit numbers For example 4 9 is valid but 12 21 is invalid Repeat Example 1 If the dialed phone number is 1 followed by zero or more 1 s e g 11 111 the call is made Substitution lt before after gt Example lt 101 9999 gt Ifthe dialed phone number is 101 101 is replaced by 9999 and then the call is made immediately Timer S s second Example 1x S
84. events regarding telephone functions Note This setting is not applicable for the current version No logs will be sent to the syslog server even if values 1 6 are specified Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 SYSLOG_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN 176 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 4 Firmware Update Settings Default Value Empty string SYSLOG PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the syslog server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 514 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example SYSLOG _RTPSMLY_INTVL_1 SYSLOG _RTPSMLY_INTVL 2 SYSLOG RTPSMLY_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds to send summarized information of RTP packets to the syslog server Value Range 0 5 65535 0 No information sent Default Value 20 5 3 4 Firmware Update Settings FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit e Local firmware updates from the Web user interface gt see 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update c
85. hertz of Dial Tone 2 using 2 whole numbers separated by acomma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 DIAL_TONE2_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of Dial Tone 2 212 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE2_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 2 is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE2_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of Dial Tone 2 using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 0 DIAL_TONE4 FRQ Value Format Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of Dial Tone 4 stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 139 DIAL_TONE4_GAIN Value F
86. iai aka eE a aa E TA a casi 175 SYSLOG A RE 175 SYSLOG EVENT CFG E 176 SYSLOG A AS 176 SYSLOG EVENT TEL EE 176 SYSLOG ADDR eebe eege 176 SY geo B BC ky oO WEEN 177 SYSLOG RIPSMLY INI VL EE 177 5 3 4 Firmware Update Settings 2 2 c0 c ccccessedesceteceenensesessssenesseaseienerseeessessasescnneteneessnnensaeeess 177 FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE namen ee ee ee 177 FIRM VERSION WE 178 FIRM UPGRADE PUT GE 178 ali BT KE 178 5 3 5 Provisioning SO WINS E 179 OPTION66_ENABLE Agenten ttace 179 DOETIONGO REBOOT ausser ee 179 Se Ee WE 180 CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH su ee ee 180 CPG PRODUCT PIRE PATH E 181 Eeer EE PATH EEN 182 CIE e EE 183 CFG FILE EE 184 GFG FILE Eeer eege 184 CFG FILE KEY LENGTH EE 184 GFG del EE 184 GCGFG CYCLUCJIN TV seen dee 185 CCRN 2008 A KEE 185 CFG sh deer Bl EE 185 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents 5 3 6 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 CFG_RESYNC_DURATION EEN 186 CFG RESTING E 186 MAINTENANCE_WEB_RESET_ON_STARTUP uuuuuusenesssssnennnnnnnnnnn nn 186 Management Server Settings 1 nenn ee a 187 ACS URE tea a Ana a ea A aaa ea a E E a A a a eaa a riS 187 ACS USER Eege EE 187 ACS EE 187 PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE EE 187 PERIODIC INFORM Ru TEEN 188 PERIODIC INFORM TIME nase ee 188 CON REQ USER IO aeara n Eaa a a ai aieiai a EiS BES 188 CON REQ EE 189 ANNEX_G_ STUN ENARLE 189 ANNEX_G_ STUN SERV ADDP ssssssisesisseiesssiessitsitsritritritssritsr
87. log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly assigned IP address of the unit using the phone user interface In addition if the IP address of the PC from which you try to access the Web user interface has been changed close the Web port once by selecting Off for Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 77 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings Embedded web on the unit gt see Opening Closing the Web Port in 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Basic Network Settings Web Port Close Network Basic Network Settings Connection Mode Connection Mode DHCP O Static Ge gem Global Address Host Name MODEL Detection S A Receive DNS server address automatically Domain Name Server OUse the following settings DNS1 DNS2 Static IP Address 192 168 0 123 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 10 DNS1 DNS2 Save Cancel 4 3 1 1 Connection Mode Connection Mode Description Selects whether to assign the IP address automatically DHCP or manually static Value Range s DHCP Static Default Value DHCP Phone User Interface Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Reference Configuration File Reference CONNECTION_TYPE Page 191 4 3 1 2 DHCP Settings Host Name Description Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP
88. not necessary to configure these settings For details about the SBC function consult your phone system dealer For details about Web user interface programming see 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings Router Setup When configuring the port forwarding function specify the router s reception port number as the unit s port number Port forwarding should be configured for the ports specified in Source Port gt see SIP Setup in this section and External RTP Port gt see RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup in this section Set the same port number for the source port and destination port and set the unit s private IP address as the destination address Because the unit s private IP address will have to be set in the router s port forwarding configuration again if it is changed set a static IP address to the unit or configure the router so that the same IP address is always assigned to the unit if IP addresses are assigned by a DHCP server For details about how to configure the router refer to the documentation for the router Because the port forwarding settings depend on the user s network environment they cannot be programmed using configuration files 1 1 7 3 Global Address Detection The global IP address is a unique IP address that is assigned to a particular terminal If the global IP address assigned to the firewall or the router is changed the unit will not be able to communicate If the global IP addresses of
89. of the values Default Value 560 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 0 100 100 100 100 100 0 Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE4_TIMING Page 214 4 6 4 5 Reorder Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_FRQ Page 215 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 139 4 6 5 Telephone Settings Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of reorder tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Default Value 60 250 190 Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_TIMING Page 216 4 6 5 Telephone Settings This screen allows you to configure various telephone settings Panasonic KX UT136 Web Port Close Tel lephone Telephone Settings import Phonebook Export Phonebook Application Settings Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Telephone Settings Telephone Settings Key Click Tone Extension PIN Number
90. on your phone system e It may be necessary to specify the Resource List URI to use this feature depending on your phone system gt see Resource List URI in 4 6 2 1 Call Control in the Web user interface or RESOURCELIST_URI_n in 5 7 1 Call Control Settings in the configuration file Off The BLF extension is idle Red on A corresponding BLF extension is using the line Flashing red rapidly The BLF extension is receiving an incoming call ACD Used to log in or log out of a group when ACD Automatic Call Distribution is enabled Note e ACD is an optional feature and may not be supported on your phone system Off Logged in Red on Logged out Wrap Up The Wrap Up button alternates the setting of Wrap Up mode Not Ready mode or Ready mode for incoming calls In Wrap Up mode Not Ready mode for incoming calls incoming calls will not be received through the ACD Automatic Call Distribution group Off Ready mode for incoming calls Red on Not Ready mode for incoming calls Flashing red Wrap Up mode 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings To set Flexible Buttons 1 In the Web user interface click the Telephone tab and then click Flexible Button Settings 2 Enter settings as described in the following table When it is necessary to set both parameter 1 and parameter 2 enter a comma between the values Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 283 6 3 1 Flexible Button Se
91. proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Enable DNS SRV lookup Page 110 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 255 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n Parameter Name Example SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_6 Value Format String Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using UDP Note e This setting is available only when SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n is set to Y Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _udp Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for UDP Page 110 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_6 Value Format String Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using TCP Note e This setting is available only when SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n is set to Y Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _tcp Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for TCP Page 111 SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1 SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2 SIP_100REL_ ENABLE 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the option tag 100re
92. static reference only Value Range e DHCP e Static Default Value Not applicable IP Address Description Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit reference only Value Range IP address Default Value Current IP address Subnet Mask Description Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit reference only Value Range Subnet mask Default Value Current subnet mask Default Gateway Description Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network reference only Note e Ifthe default gateway address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the default gateway Default Value Not applicable 74 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 2 3 VoIP Status DNS1 Description Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server reference only Note s Ifthe primary DNS server address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the primary DNS server Default Value Not applicable DNS2 Description Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server reference only Note If the secondary DNS server address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the secondary DNS server Default Value Not applicable
93. the call is denied after the inter digit timer expires Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied after the inter digit timer expires No Match Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 x 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 0011 1011 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires Ifthe dialed phone number is 0011 1011 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only You can customize the flexible buttons on the unit They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface gt see 4 6 3 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only or by configuration file programming gt see 5 5 5 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Note e This feature may not be supported on your phone system The following types of flexible buttons are available Button Description Lamp Indication DN
94. the destination to forward calls to when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 32 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty if No Answer Enable Call Forward is set to Yes Default Value Not stored No Answer Ring Count Description Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call is forwarded Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range 0 2 20 0 No ring Default Value 3 134 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 3 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only 4 6 3 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only This screen allows you to configure various features for each flexible button For more details see 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Flexible Button Settings Telephone Flexible Button Settings No T
95. the form of a valid HTTP or HTTPS URL as defined in RFC 3986 Value Range Max 256 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference ACS_URL Page 187 4 7 4 2 Management Server Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the user ID for the Auto Configuration Server for using TR 069 Value Range Max 255 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference ACS_USER_ID Page 187 Authentication Password 4 7 5 Reset to Defaults 152 Description Specifies the user password for the Auto Configuration Server for using TR 069 Value Range Max 255 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference ACS_PASS Page 187 This screen allows you to reset the settings made through the Web user interface to their default values by clicking Reset Web Settings After you click this button a dialog box is displayed asking whether you want to reset the settings Click OK to reset or Cancel not to For details about the reset see 1 2 1 3 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web Settings Notice After resetting the settings the unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface or on calls Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 7 6 Restart Note e Ifyou have changed the default pass
96. the unit but that are not mentioned in the Operating Instructions To enter direct commands use the dial keys and soft buttons on the unit For details about the other available features settings and key operations on the phone user interface refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 3 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands The following table shows additional features programmable with direct commands These commands are hidden from end users Beie d Feature Ref 1 3 6 Resetting the unit Page 29 2 8 9 Delete all items of phonebook Page 56 5 3 4 Embedded web Page 22 1 71 31 1 Terminal No Page 56 7 3 9 Reset Web ID Password Page 57 1 21 71 6 Sound Quality Page 57 1 Not displayed on the LCD of the unit 7 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT 133 KX UT136 only 3 1 2 Phonebook deletion You can delete all items in the phonebook by performing the procedure below from the unit To delete all items in the phonebook 1 Press BZ or Ey 2 Press 2 8 9 3 Press A or Y to select Yes to delete all items in the phonebook and then press ENTER 3 1 3 Terminal Number Settings 56 You can select the terminal number of the unit that you are using from Terminal 1 Terminal 9 and Auto The default setting is Auto Auto does not assign a fixed terminal number to the unit If multipl
97. the unit returns to idle Incorrect settings may cause a network failure In such a case you cannot access the Web user interface anymore To access it again you need to correct the speed duplex settings or perform IP Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 81 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings Reset through phone user interface programming For details refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Panasonic Status Network Syste Maintenance Web Pon Ciose Ethernet Port Settings Network Link Speed Duplex Mode Sesto Seed Settings LAN Port Auto Nagatiation z ee IEEE202 1X Settings PC Port Auto Negotiation LLOP Yes No ee Da _ VLAN ID 2 IP Phone Priority 7 VLAN ID 0 0 4094 Priority pa VLAN Settings Enable VLAN C Yes No VLAN ID E 1 4094 IP Phone Priority a D VLAN ID fi 1 4094 Priorty a The phone reboots automatically if you change the settings on this screen Save Cancel 4 3 2 1 Link Speed Duplex Mode LAN Port Description Selects the connection mode link speed and duplex mode ofthe LAN port Value Range e Auto Negotiation e 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 10 Mbps Half Duplex Note s The KX UT248 supports Gigabit Ethernet When connecting to a network that supports Gigabit Ethernet select Auto Negotiation Default Value Auto Negotiation PC Port KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 on
98. these terminals are assigned by a DHCP server in the higher level network where they are connected the IP address may differ each time the unit transmits data The Global Address Detection feature detects the current global IP address and if the IP address has changed sets it automatically to the SIP server There are 2 methods using STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs or SIP messages to perform this feature For details about specifying this setting through the Web user interface see 4 3 5 Global Address Detection Note e For details about server information consult your network administrator 1 2 Reset and Firmware Update 1 2 1 Reset 1 2 1 1 Resetting to Factory Default Factory Setting Performing Factory Setting from the phone user interface resets all settings in the unit to their factory defaults This type of initialization also deletes all other data on the unit such as the call logs and the phonebook To perform this initialization follow the procedure below Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 29 1 2 1 Reset 1 Press RQ or Ey 2 Press 1 3 6 3 Press A or Y to select Factory Setting and then press ENTER 4 Press a or Y to select yes and then press ENTER 5 Press A or Y to select Yes and then press ENTER Notice e After performing Factory Setting the unit will restart automatically To avoid problems it is recommended that you save your settings befo
99. unit For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the unit refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction For details about configuring network settings via the Web user interface see 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings To configure network settings automatically Press EZ or ED Press 4 or Y to select Network Settings and then press ENTER Press A or Y to select Network and then press ENTER Press 4 or Y to select DHCP and then press ENTER Press A or Y to select Automatic for DNS and then press ENTER e Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary DNS2 secondary DNS server manually and then press ENTER 6 Press CANCEL af eS To configure network settings manually Press EB or ED Press 4 or Y to select Network Settings and then press ENTER Press A or Y to select Network and then press ENTER Press 4 or V to select STATIC and then press ENTER Enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary DNS2 secondary DNS server and then press ENTER Press CANCEL ae Ben D Note e If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information Document Version 2013 03 Admin
100. unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this field it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Configuration File Reference SIP_USER_AGENT Page 246 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows es KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 e KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 e KX UT248 1 6 Note e When registering multiple phone numbers on a KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 it is necessary to set up DN buttons flexible buttons Otherwise calls cannot be made Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 105 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x For details about flexible buttons see 4 6 3 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System I VoIP Telephone Maintenance SIP Settings Line 1 Web Port Close VoIP Phone Number SIP Settings Phone Number SIP URI Registrar Server Address Registrar Server Port EX Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port Presence Server Address Presence Server Port
101. user interface programming 2 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 159 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Telephone Settings 160 Category Parameter Name Ref Call Control Settings VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Page 205 CONFERENCE _SERVER_URI Page 205 FIRSTDIGIT TIM Page 206 INTDIGIT TIM Page 206 MACRODIGIT_TIM Page 206 INTERNATIONAL ACCESS CODE Page 206 COUNTRY_CALLING CODE Page 207 NATIONAL ACCESS CODE Page 207 DEFAULT LINE SELECT Page 207 DATA_LINE MODE Page 207 NON PLAN PICKUP_DIRECT Page 208 TALK PACKAGE Page 208 HOLD PACKAGE Page 208 HOLD RECALL TIM Page 208 AUTO ANS RING TIM Page 209 RINGING OFF_ SETTING ENABLE Page 209 AUTO_CALL HOLD Page 209 REDIALKEY CALLLOG ENABLE Page 209 ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE Page 210 DISCONNECTION MODE Page 210 TONE LEN DISCONNECT HANDSET Page 210 TONE LEN DISCONNECT HANDSFREE Page 210 KEY PAD TONE Page 210 HOLD AND CALL ENABLE Page 211 HOLD _TRANSFER_OPERATION Page 211 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Tone Settings DIAL TONE1_FRQ Page 211 DIAL _TONE1_GAIN Page 211 DIAL _TONE1_RPT Page 212 DIAL _TONE1_TIMING Page 212 DIAL _TONE2_FRQ
102. 1 194 196 Secure Provisioning Methods 44 Security 114 Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server 123 Service Domain 109 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 50 Setting Priority 45 Shared Call 128 243 SHARED_CALL ENABLE_n 243 SIP Authentication 109 SIP extensions 113 SIP Packet QoS DSCP 113 SIP Server 107 SIP Service Domain 109 SIP Setting 105 SIP Settings 28 104 105 165 246 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x 105 SIP Setup 28 SIP Source Address Filter SSAF 114 264 SIP Source Port 109 SIP URI 107 SIP User Agent 105 SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n 256 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n 257 308 Administrator Guide SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_n 252 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_n 252 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_n 258 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_n 258 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_n 253 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_n 253 SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_n 269 SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n 267 SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n 269 SIP_ADD_RPORT_n 259 SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n 263 SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n 264 SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n 264 SIP_AUTHID_n 248 SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n 265 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n 264 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n 255 SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n 268 SIP_FOVR_MAX_n 255 SIP_FOVR_MODE_n 268 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n 254 SIP_HOLD_HOLDRECEIVE_n 267 SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n 257 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n 262 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n 263 SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n 261 SIP_PASS_n 249 SIP_PRIVACY_n 261 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n 257 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n 258 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n 249 SIP_PRXY_PORT_n 249 SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n 265 SIP_REFRESHER_n 255 SIP_REQURI_PORT_n 260 SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT 26
103. 19 EGRET EE 119 4 5 4 5 Cal e e WEE 120 Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 40nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 120 4 5 4 6 CODEC Preferences ccccscceseeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceeaeeeaaanaaaaaaaaaacesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 120 ETERA EE 120 G722 Priority siaatte eet ENEE 120 PEMA Enable EE 121 PCMA Priority EE 121 G726 32 Enable EE 121 G726 32 Priority nissan 121 S72 OF Enable EE 121 G729A Priority EEN 122 PEMU tia le EE 122 PCMU Priority geerereegtegug EE tete i aaike sa aina at aAa ES e erisa 122 4 6 Telephone EG 122 4 6 1 Calli e lte ET 123 4 6 1 1 Calli COMMON EE 123 Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server nn 123 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 7 Table of Contents 8 4 6 1 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 1 4 6 2 2 4 6 2 3 4 6 2 4 ae a w w 4 6 4 4 6 4 1 4 6 4 2 4 6 4 3 4 6 4 4 4 6 4 5 Conference Server URI VEPRAUBEERENERBERBSEBEHBEBEEBEDENHEBREOERERLDEURLEEEREEBEBRBRETFENZSTEBEN HEEKERELDEFPEBER 124 LC ee Hegle EE 124 Timer for Dial Plan ccceccccceececeeeeeceeeceeeceeaeeeaaaeaaaaaaeeaeaeaaeseeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 124 International Call Prefix u04444444044nnennnennnennnnenneennnennee nennen nenn 124 Country Calling Code EE 125 National Access ee ENEE 125 Default Line for Outgoing ME 125 Flash Recall Button erretiradan iarr reae EEE EEEE EEEE a AE EERE a Eians 125 Flash Hook Event nsnsesnne
104. 2 If the dialed phone number begins with 1 the call is made after a lapse of 2 seconds The number 0 9 followed by S or s shows the duration in seconds until the call is made 280 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings Element Available Value Description Macro Timer T t Example 1x T If the dialed phone number begins with 1 the call is made after a lapse of T seconds e The value of T or t can be configured through the Web user interface see Timer for Dial Plan in 4 6 1 1 Call Control Reject Example 123xxx Ifthe dialed phone number is 123 followed by 3 digits the call is not made Alternation Example 1xxxx 2xxx If the dialed phone number is 1 followed by 4 digits or 2 followed by 3 digits the call is made immediately You can use this element to specify multiple numbers e You can enter up to 1000 characters in Dial Plan e You can assign up to 100 dial plans separated by in Dial Plan e You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in Dial Plan e You can assign up to 10 substitutions in Dial Plan e After the user completes dialing the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes in the Web user interface or if DIAL_PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE _n is setto N in a configuration file The unit recognizes the end of dialing as follows
105. 2 DIAL_TONE2_FRQ 212 DIAL_TONE2_ GAIN 212 DIAL_TONE2_ RPT 213 DIAL_TONE2_TIMING 213 DIAL_TONE4 FRQ 213 DIAL_TONE4 GAIN 213 DIAL_TONE4 RPT 214 DIAL_TONE4 TIMING 214 Direct Call Pickup 126 Direct Commands 56 DISCONNECTION_MODE 210 Display Name 127 DISPLAY_DATE_PATTERN 222 DISPLAY_NAME_n 242 DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE 222 DISPLAY_TIME_PATTERN 223 DNS 110 DNS Server 19 79 192 DNS Server Settings 19 DNS Settings 19 158 195 DNS_PRIORITY 195 DNS_QRY_PRLL 195 DNS1 75 80 DNS1_ADDR 195 DNS2 75 81 DNS2_ADDR 196 Do Not Disturb 128 131 132 133 244 Domain Name Server 79 Downloading a Configuration File via the Web User Interface 40 DSCP_RTCP_n 235 DSCP_RTP_n 235 DSCP_SIP_n 252 DST Offset Summer Time Offset 101 DST_ENABLE 171 DST_OFFSET 171 DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK 172 DST_START_MONTH 172 Document Version 2013 03 DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY 172 DST_START_TIME 173 DST_STOP_DAY_OF WEEK 174 DST_STOP_MONTH 173 DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY 174 DST_STOP_TIME 174 DTMF 119 DTMF Relay 119 DTMF Type 119 DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM 241 DTMF_RELAY_n 240 DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN 241 E Editing with Microsoft Excel 275 Embedded web 22 Enable Application 94 Enable DNS SRV lookup 110 Enable DST Enable Summer Time 101 Enable Firmware Update 146 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line 93 Enable IEEE802 1X 86 Enable LLDP 83 Enable Provisioning 149 Enable Proxy 89 Enable Shared Call 128 Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 114 Enable
106. 224 POUND _KEY DELIMITER ENABLE Page 224 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings ADJDATA_GAIN Page 225 ADJDATA_ATT KX UT113 KX UT123 Page 226 KX UT133 KX UT136 only Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx Page 227 OD NEE FLEX BUTTON _FACILITY_ARGx Page 227 FLEX BUTTON QUICK DIALx Page 227 FLEX BUTTON LABELx Page 228 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref XML Application Settings XMLAPP ENABLE Page 228 XMLAPP_USERID Page 228 XMLAPP_USERPASS Page 229 XMLAPP_START_URL Page 229 XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL Page 229 XMLAPP_INCOMING URL Page 229 XMLAPP_TALKING URL Page 230 XMLAPP_MAKECALL URL Page 230 XMLAPP_CALLLOG URL Page 230 XMLAPP_IDLING URL Page 230 XMLAPP_LDAP_ URL Page 231 XMLAPP_LDAP USERID Page 231 XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS Page 231 XML INITIATE KEY SOFT1 Page 231 XML INITIATE KEY SOFT2 Page 232 XML INITIATE KEY SOFT3 Page 232 XML INITIATE KEY SOFT4 Page 232 XML INITIATE KEY _FWDDND Page 232 XML INITIATE KEY FLASH Page 232 XML_ERROR_INFORMATION Page 233 XML HTTPD PORT Page 233 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface VoIP Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Codec Settings CODEC_G711_REQ Page 233 CODEC_G729 PARAM Page 234 CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Pag
107. 35 Default Value 5 Web User Interface Reference RTCP Interval Page 118 MAX_DELAY_n Parameter Name Example MAX _ DELAY 1 MAX_DELAY_2 MAX_DELAY_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 3 50 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than NOM_DELAY This value must be greater than MIN_DELAY NOM DELAY must be greater than or equal to MIN DELAY Default Value 20 Web User Interface Reference Maximum Delay Page 118 MIN_DELAY_n 236 Parameter Name Example MIN DELAY_ 1 MIN DELAY_2 MIN _DELAY_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the minimum delay in 10 millisecond units ofthe jitter buffer Value Range 1 or 2 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be less than or equal to NOM_DELAY This value must be less than MAX_DELAY MAX DELAY must be greater than NOM_DELAY Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Minimum Delay Page 118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 NOM_DELAY_n 5 6 2 RTP Settings Parameter Name Example NOM_DELAY_1 NOM DELAY 2 NOM_DELAY_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the initial
108. 5 0 2 00 00 Note e If this parameter is specified the following parameters are disabled and operation will be based on this parameter TIME_ZONE DST_ENABLE DST_OFFSET DST_START MONTH DST_START_ORDINAL DAY DST_START DAY OF WEEK DST_START_ TIME DST_STOP_MONTH DST_STOP_ORDINAL DAY DST_STOP_DAY OF WEEK DST_STOP_TIME Value Range Max 70 characters Default Value Empty string 5 3 3 Syslog Settings SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP Value Format Integer Description Specifies which SIP related syslog events are sent to the syslog server Note s Ifthe level of the event is higher than or equal to the set value the log is sent to the syslog server Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 175 5 3 3 Syslog Settings Value Range 0 6 0 no logs sent 1 emergency highest 2 alert 3 critical 4 error 5 warning 6 information lowest Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG Value Format Integer Description Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding configuration Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP Value Format Integer Description Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding VoIP operation Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the threshold of syslog
109. 8 SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND 268 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n 250 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n 250 SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n 251 SIP_SESSION_TIME_n 251 SIP_SRC_PORT_n 249 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n 260 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n 250 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n 256 SIP_TIMER_B_n 265 SIP_TIMER_D_n 265 SIP_TIMER_F_n 266 SIP_TIMER_H_n 266 SIP_TIMER_J_n 266 SIP_TIMER_T1_n 253 SIP_TIMER_T2_n 253 SIP_TIMER_T4_n 254 SIP_TRANSPORT_n 263 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n 256 SIP_URI_n 247 SIP_USER_AGENT 246 Sound Quality 57 Source Port 109 SRV lookup Prefix for TCP 111 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP 110 SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 114 264 SSL 44 Document Version 2013 03 Index Standard Configuration File 39 149 180 Standard File URL 149 Start Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time 102 Static IP Address 79 Static NAPT Settings 91 Static Settings 79 STATIC_GATEWAY 193 STATIC_IP_ADDRESS 193 STATIC_SUBNET 193 Statistical Information 118 Status 60 Status Tab 60 71 STUN Server 91 202 STUN Server Address 91 STUN Server Port 91 STUN Settings 159 202 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR 203 STUN_2NDSERV_PORT 203 STUN_SERV_ADDR 202 STUN_SERV_PORT 202 Stutter Tone 139 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n 262 SUB_RTX_INTVL_n 260 Subnet Mask 74 80 Supports 100rel RFC 3262 113 Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 120 Supports Rport RFC 3581 114 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 113 Synchronization 100 Synchronization Interval 100 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward 128 Sys
110. CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC_SUBNET together in a configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference Static IP Address Page 79 STATIC_SUBNET Value Format String Description Specifies the subnet mask for the unit Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC_IP_ADDRESS together in a configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference Subnet Mask Page 80 STATIC_GATEWAY Value Format String Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 193 5 4 1 IP Settings Description Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where the unit is connected Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC _IP_AD
111. CRIBE_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range e Y Send the SUBSCRIBE request N Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server Page 123 CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI Value Format String Description Specifies the URI for a conference server which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip conference example com Note e InaSIP URI the user part conference in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Conference Server URI Page 124 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 205 5 5 1 Call Control Settings FIRSTDIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds within which the first digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires the unit will play a busy tone Value Range 1 600 Default Value 30 INTDIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Spe
112. Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 7 Other Network Settings Check Call Control for each line in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface If Do Not Disturb is set to Yes the unit does not receive calls gt see 4 6 2 3 Call Features If Unconditional Enable Call Forward is set to Yes the unit does not receive calls gt see 4 6 2 4 Call Forward If Block Anonymous Call is set to Yes the unit does not receive anonymous calls gt see 4 6 2 3 Call Features Check that Do Not Disturb Enable Call Forward and Block Anonymous Call are not controlled by your phone system For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer cannot make a call Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 7 Other Network Settings For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer Password for Web User Interface Prog rammi
113. DDRESS Page 193 STATIC_SUBNET Page 193 STATIC GATEWAY Page 193 USER_DNS1_ADDR Page 194 USER_DNS2_ADDR Page 194 DNS Settings DNS_ORY PRLL Page 195 DNS_PRIORITY Page 195 DNS1_ADDR Page 195 DNS2_ADDR Page 196 158 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Ethernet Port Settings VLAN_ENABLE Page 196 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE Page 196 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE Page 197 VLAN_ID_PC Page 197 VLAN PRI PC Page 197 IEEE 802 1X Settings KX UT248 IEEE8021X_ ENABLE Page 198 SES IEEE8021X AUTH PRTCL Page 198 IEEE8021X_USER_ID Page 198 IEEE8021X_USER_PASS Page 199 HTTP Settings HTTPD_PORTOPEN AUTO Page 199 HTTP_VER Page 200 HTTP_USER_AGENT Page 200 HTTP _SSL_VERIFY Page 200 CFG_ROOT CERTIFICATE PATH Page 201 Time Adjust Settings NTP_ADDR Page 201 TIME_SYNC_INTVL Page 202 TIME_QUERY_INTVL Page 202 STUN Settings STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 202 STUN_SERV_PORT Page 202 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR Page 203 STUN_2NDSERV_PORT Page 203 Miscellaneous Network Settings NW_SETTING_ENABLE Page 203 CUSTOM WER PAGE Page 203 LLDP MED Settings LLDP_ENABLE Page 204 LLDP_INTERVAL Page 204 LLDP_VLAN_ID_ PC Page 204 LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC Page 205 This setting can also be configured through other programming methods phone user interface programming or Web
114. DEL cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_PRODUCT FILE PATH http host dir becomes CFG_PRODUCT_ FILE PATH http host dir MODEL cfg Default Value Empty string Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Web User Interface Reference Product File URL Page 150 CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file which is used when all units need the same settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time 182 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 500 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt scheme gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 128 characters lt password gt must be less than 128 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt scheme gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 245 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s
115. DRESS and STATIC SUBNET together ina configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference Default Gateway Page 80 USER_DNS1_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference DNS1 Page 80 USER_DNS2 ADDR 194 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION _TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference DNS2 Page 81 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 2 DNS Settings 5 4 2 DNS Settings DNS_QRY_PRLL Value Format Boolean Description
116. Disable Basic Network Settings and Time Adjust Settings Default Value 5 4 9 LLDP MED Settings LLDP_ENABLE Value Format Integer Description Selects whether to enable or disable sending and receiving LLDP frames Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e You should specify Y for only one of LLDP_ENABLE VLAN_ENABLE or IEEE802 1X_ENABLE If x is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X_ENABLE gt VLAN_ENABLE gt LLDP_ENABLE Therefore if Y is specified for both VLAN_ENABLE and LLDP_ENABLE the VLAN related settings are used Value Range e Y Enable e N Disable Default Value Y LLDP_INTERVAL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between sending each LLDP frame Value Range 1 3600 Default Value 30 LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC port when LLDP is on Value Range 0 4094 Default Value 0 204 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 1 Call Control Settings LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN Priority for the PC port when LLDP is on Value Range 0 7 Default Value 0 5 5 Telephone Settings 5 5 1 Call Control Settings VM_SUBS
117. E E EE 142 4 6 8 Application Settings snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnn 143 4 6 8 1 Application Bootup URL 143 3 EE 143 4 6 8 2 Application initial URL 144 U 2 E HERRPRERNEBEENGERF 144 4 6 8 3 Incoming call URL ne ee a ee 144 EI E 144 4 6 8 4 ECH store EE 144 U 2 EE 144 4 6 8 5 Making Call TT 144 9 EE 144 4 6 8 6 Galllog URL rn ee en rennen 145 Reeg 145 4 6 8 7 elle WR EEN 145 EN EE 145 4 6 8 8 Network Phone Book URL 145 Fra EE 145 4 6 8 9 Network Phone Book URL Authentication u444nnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnn 145 Authentication ID 145 Authentication Password 146 4 7 EE 146 4 7 1 Firmware Maintenance 2 cesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaes 146 4 7 1 1 Firmware Maintenance nenn nnnnnennnnnnnn nn 146 Enable Firmware Update nenn 146 Update Type nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnennnne nennen 147 Firmware File URL cccccccccecceeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceseneeseaaeseaaeeeaaeaaaanaaeasaeaaes 147 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update nenne nnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennen ann 147 4 7 2 1 Local Firmware Update nn nnsnnn nn 148 le e EE 148 Kile El EEN 148 4 7 3 PROVISIONING Nie TE 148 4 7 3 1 Provisioning Maintenance EE 149 Enable OUTS MING WEE 149 Standard File URL EE 149 Product File URL 150 Master File URL srera A ENEE 150 CHG AUO ER 150 Resyne MLS AM EE 151 Hea
118. END_BY_SDP_n Parameter Name Example RTCP_SEND BY SDP_1 RTCP_SEND BY SDP _2 RTCP_SEND_ BY SDP_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to send RTCP signals by SDP Session Description Protocol Value Range 0 1 0 Send RTCP signals using the value specified in RTCP_INTVL_n if the RTCP_ENABLE_n parameter is enabled 1 Send RTCP signals using the value specified in the SDP attribute a rtcp Default Value RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_1 RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_2 RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable processing to close held RTP sockets Value Range Y Enable RTP Close e N Disable RTP Close Default Value Y 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF_n Parameter Name Example OUTBANDDTMF 1 OUTBANDDTMF 2 OUTBANDDTMF_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the method for transmitting DTMF tones Value Range e Y Outband use telephone event N Inband Note s If setto Y DTMF tones will be sent through SDP compliant with RFC 2833 s If setto N DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference DTMF Type Page 119 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 239 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings DTM
119. Enable Synchronization by vs v Page 100 Settings NTP Synchronization Interval Su SW Page 100 Time Server NTP Server Address ve vw Page 101 Time Zone Time Zone ve vi Page 101 Daylight Saving Time Enable DST Enable Summer vil v Page 101 Summer Time Time DST Offset Summer Time v3 x Page 101 Offset Start Day and Time of Month ve v Page 102 DST let Day ent bay of Wea EA Time ve vw Page 103 End Day and Time of Month ve vi Page 103 nn ag ne Day of Week ve vi Page 103 Time ve v Page 104 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List VoIP Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Leve Ref U A SIP Settings SIP Setting SIP User Agent v Page 105 SIP Settings Phone Number Phone Number v Page 106 Line 1 Line x SIP URI v Page 107 SIP Server Registrar Server Address v Page 107 Registrar Server Port v Page 107 Proxy Server Address v Page 107 Proxy Serve
120. F_RELAY_n Parameter Name Example DTMF_RELAY 1 DTMF RELAY 2 DTMF_ RELAY 6 Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether DTMF tones are sent in the SIP INFO message Value Range es Y N Note e Ifsetto Y DTMF tones will be sent in the SIP INFO message e If set to N the method selected in OUTBANDDTMF_n will be used Default Value N Web User Interface Reference DTMF Relay Page 119 OUTBANDDTMF_VOL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the volume in decibels dB of the DTMF tone using RFC 2833 Value Range 63 0 Default Value 5 INBANDDTMF_VOL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the volume in decibels dB of in band DTMF tones Value Range 46 0 Default Value 5 TELEVENT_PAYLOAD Value Format Integer Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones Note e This setting is available only when OUTBANDDTMF_n is set to Sa Value Range 96 127 Default Value 101 240 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings Web User Interface Reference Telephone event Payload Type Page 116 RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 1 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 2 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 C
121. Guide 17 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup 1 1 Setup 1 1 1 Factory Defaults Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships Where possible these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting For example the port number of the SIP Session Initiation Protocol server is set to 5060 However many of the settings such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number have not been pre configured and they must be modified depending on the usage environment If the port number of the SIP server is not 5060 the value of this setting must be changed This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings The settings for each feature must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used 1 1 2 Language Selection for the Unit You can change the language used on the LCD In addition various settings can be configured by accessing the Web user interface from a PC on the same network gt see Section 4 Web User Interface Programming You can select the language for the Web user interface Note e To select the display language for the unit refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction e To select the display language for the Web user interface see 4 4 1 Web Language 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before yo
122. HE HE FE FE HE EHH HE HE FE HE HE FE FE HE E FE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE FE FE RRE HE HE HE HE HH HE HE Call Control Settings FE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE HE HE FE FE HE E FE FE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE HE E HE FE HE E FE FE HE E FE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE HH HE HE Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE y Shared Call Settings SHARED CALL ENABLE _1 Y Disables Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization FWD_DND SYNCHRO ENABLE 1 N 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 TR 069 Technical Report 069 is a protocol for the remote management of terminals using the technical specifications of CWMP CPE Customer Premises Equipment WAN Management Protocol TR 069 allows terminals to have their settings configured automatically via connection to ACSs Auto Configuration Servers For details about setting up the parameters necessary for using TR 069 see 4 7 4 Management Server and 5 3 6 Management Server Settings Notice e Settings that are configured using TR 069 can also be configured using the standard configuration file Therefore take care that settings do not overlap when using both configuration methods together Settings configured using TR 069 Parameter Name Requirement Ref TR 069 Parameter Configuration File Parameter TR 106 Device Time NTPServer1 NTP_ADDR Page 201 TR 106 Device Time LocalTimeZ
123. IP Settings Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP v Page 117 Line 1 Line x RTCP Packet QoS DSCP v Page 117 Statistical Information RTCP Enable v Page 118 RTOP Interval v Page 118 Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay v Page 118 Minimum Delay v Page 118 Initial Delay v Page 119 DTMF DTMF Type v Page 119 DTMF Relay v Page 119 Call Hold Supports RFC 2543 v Page 120 c 0 0 0 0 66 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A CODEC Preferences G722 Enable v Page 120 Priority v Page 120 PCMA _ Enable v Page 121 Priority v Page 121 6726 32 Enable v Page 121 Priority v Page 121 G729A z Sg Enable v Page 121 Priority v Page 122 PCMU m Enable v Page 122 Priority v Page 122 1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 67 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Telephone Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Lever Ref U A Call Control Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice v Page 123 Mail Server Conference Server
124. Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction For details about additional features available with direct commands see Section 3 Phone User Interface Programming 1 1 5 1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming You can change the language used on the LCD Because the language settings for the LCD of the unit are not synchronized you must set the languages individually for the unit For details about changing the setting refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 20 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming After connecting the unit to your network you can configure the unit s settings by accessing the Web user interface from a PC connected to the same network For details see Section 4 Web User Interface Programming Hub SIP Phone 1 1 6 1 Password for Web User Interface Programming To program the unit via the Web user interface a login account is required There are 2 types of accounts and each has different access privileges e User User accounts are for use by end users Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit e Administrator Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration Administrators can change all the settings including the network settings in addition to the settings that c
125. Interface Reference Flash Hook Event Page 126 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 245 5 7 2 SIP Settings VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE HOLD SOUND _PATH_n Value Format Boolean Description Selects how the existence of voice messages is determined when a Messages Waiting yes message is received Value Range e y Determines that voice messages exist when Messages Waiting yes is received with a Voice Message line included MN Determines that voice messages exist when Messages Waiting yes is received even without a Voice Message line included Default Value Parameter Name Example HOLD_SOUND_PATH_1 HOLD SOUND PATH 2 HOLD _SOUND_PATH 6 Value Format Integer Description Selects whether the unit s hold tone or the network server s hold tone Music on hold is played when a party is put on hold Note e Itis necessary to set the following parameters to play the unit s hold tone HOLD _TONE_FRQ HOLD _TONE_ GAIN HOLD _TONE_RPT HOLD _TONE_TIMING Value Range 0 1 0 The unit s hold tone is played 1 The network server s hold tone Music on hold is played Default Value 0 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_USER_AGENT Value Format String 246 Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP messages Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03
126. KX UT 136 KX UT248 phonebook entries can be stored in the unit If the unit already has phonebook data it accepts up to the 500th entry including the existing entries The rest of the entries will not be imported and the message Memory Full is displayed on the unit The name can contain up to 24 characters The phone number can contain up to 32 digits Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly e Ifthe export is interrupted by an operation on the unit only the data that has been successfully exported before the interruption is exported to a file 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel You can then import the phonebook data into units To open the phonebook data on a PC 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 Click Office Button and then Open Note e Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure If you change the extension of a TSV file to csv the file will open by simply double clicking it However the character encoding of the file might not be recognized properly resulting in garbled characters or the phone numbers might be recognized as numbers resulting in data alteration Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 275 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel 3 Select All Files for the file type select the exported phonebook data file and click Open Select Data Source Fe aa
127. MT 07 00 360 GMT 06 00 300 GMT 05 00 240 GMT 04 00 210 GMT 03 30 180 GMT 03 00 120 GMT 02 00 60 GMT 01 00 0 GMT 60 GMT 01 00 120 GMT 02 00 180 GMT 03 00 210 GMT 03 30 240 GMT 04 00 270 GMT 04 30 300 GMT 05 00 330 GMT 05 30 345 GMT 05 45 360 GMT 06 00 390 GMT 06 30 420 GMT 07 00 480 GMT 08 00 540 GMT 09 00 570 GMT 09 30 600 GMT 10 00 660 GMT 11 00 720 GMT 12 00 780 GMT 13 00 e If yourlocation is west of Greenwich 0 GMT the value should be minus For example the value for New York City U S A is 300 Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind GMT e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Time Zone Page 101 DST_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable DST Summer Time Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range e yY Enable DST Summer Time e N Disable DST Summer Time Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable DST Enable Summer Time Page 101 DST_OFFSET Value Format Integer Description Specifies the amount of time in minutes to change the time when DST_ENABLE is set to Y Note e This parameter is disabled when
128. N 218 HOLD_ALARM_RPT 218 HOLD_ALARM_TIMING 218 HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE 211 HOLD_PACKAGE 208 HOLD_RECALL_TIM 208 HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n 246 HOLD_TONE_FRQ 219 HOLD_TONE_GAIN 219 HOLD_TONE_RPT 220 HOLD_TONE_TIMING 220 HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION 211 Host Name 78 HOST_NAME 192 HTTP Authentication 89 HTTP Client Settings 88 HTTP Settings 159 199 HTTP User Agent 88 HTTP Version 88 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY 200 HTTP_USER_AGENT 200 HTTP_VER 200 HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO 199 HTTPS 44 45 Idling URL 145 IEEE 802 1X Settings 159 198 IEEE802 1X Authentication 87 IEEE802 1X Settings 86 IEEE802 1X Status 75 IEEE8021X_AUTH_PRTCL 198 IEEE8021X_ENABLE 198 IEEE8021X_USER_ID 198 IEEE8021X_USER_PASS 199 Import Button 274 306 Administrator Guide Import Phonebook 141 142 274 Import Export File Format 273 Import Export Operation 274 INBANDDTMF_VOL 240 Incoming call URL 144 Incorrect Example 49 Initial Delay 119 INTDIGIT_TIM 206 Inter digit Timeout 124 International Call Prefix 124 INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE 206 IP Address 74 IP Phone 83 IP Phone Priority 84 85 IP Phone VLAN ID 85 IP Reset 30 IP Settings 158 191 IPL Version 72 J Jitter Buffer 118 K Keep Alive Interval 114 Key Click Tone 140 KEY_PAD_TONE 210 L Label Name No 1 24 136 LAN Port 82 Language 95 Language Selection 18 20 21 95 Language Selection for the Unit 18 Line 1 Linex 93 Line No 76 Line Settings 165 242 LINE_ENABLE_n 248 Link Speed Duplex
129. NNEX_G STUN_ENABLE is set to Y Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the STUN username to be used in Binding Requests only if message integrity has been requested by the STUN server Note e Ifthe value for this setting is an empty string the CPE must not send STUN Binding Requests with message integrity Value Range Max 256 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string ANNEX G STUN PASS Value Format String Description Specifies the STUN password to be used in computing the MESSAGE INTEGRITY attribute used in Binding Requests only if message integrity has been requested by the STUN server When read this parameter returns an empty string regardless of the actual value Value Range Max 256 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE Value Format Integer 190 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 1 IP Settings Description Specifies the maximum period in seconds that STUN Binding Requests must be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway This applies specifically to Binding Requests sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port Note e This setting is available on
130. N_ACK_ 1 SIP_CONTACT ON ACK 2 SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the Contact header to SIP ACK message Value Range e Y Add the Contact header N Do not add the Contact header Default Value N SIP_TIMER_B_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER B 1 SIP_TIMER_B 2 SIP_TIMER B 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value of SIP timer B INVITE transaction timeout timer in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 Web User Interface Reference Timer B Page 112 SIP_TIMER_D_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER D_1 SIP_TIMER_D 2 SIP_TIMER D 6 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 265 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value of SIP timer D wait time for answer resending in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 0 250 64000 Default Value 5000 Web User Interface Reference Timer D Page 112 SIP_TIMER_F_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER F 1 SIP_TIMER F 2 SIP_TIMER_F_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value of SIP timer F non INVITE transaction timeout timer in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 Web
131. Not stored For KX UT248 No 1 1 No 2 2 No 3 3 No 24 24 Web User Interface Reference Label Name No 1 24 Page 136 5 5 6 XML Application Settings XMLAPP_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether to enable the XML application feature Value Range e x The port is opened e N The port is closed Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable Application Page 94 XMLAPP_USERID 228 Value Format String Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML application server Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 94 XMLAPP_USERPASS Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML application server Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 95 XMLAPP_START_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters
132. P Transport Protocol Description Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets Value Range e UDP e TCP Default Value UDP Configuration File Reference SIP_TRANSPORT_n Page 263 4 5 2 9 Timer Settings T1 Timer Description Selects the default interval in milliseconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range e 250 500 e 1000 e 2000 e 4000 Default Value 500 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T1_n Page 253 T2 Timer Description Selects the maximum interval in seconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 111 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x Value Range e 2 e 4 e 8 e 16 32 Default Value 4 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T2_n Page 253 Timer B Description Specifies the value of SIP timer B INVITE transaction timeout timer in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_B_n Page 265 Timer D Description Specifies the value of SIP timer D wait time for answer resending in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 0 250 64000 Default Value 5000 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_D_n Page 265 Tim
133. PTION66 ENABLE Page 179 OPTION66_ REBOOT Page 179 PROVISION_ENABLE Page 180 CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH Page 180 CFG_PRODUCT_FILE PATH Page 181 CFG_MASTER FILE PATH Page 182 CFG_FILE KEY1 Page 183 CFG_FILE KEY2 Page 184 CFG_FILE KEY3 Page 184 CFG_FILE KEY LENGTH Page 184 CFG CYCLIC Page 184 CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL Page 185 CFG_RTRY_INTVL Page 185 CFG_RESYNC_TIME Page 185 CFG_RESYNC_DURATION Page 186 CFG_RESYNC_FROM SIP Page 186 MAINTENANCE WEB RESET ON STARTUP Page 186 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 157 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Management Server Settings ACS_ URL Page 187 ACS_USER_ID Page 187 ACS PASS Page 187 PERIODIC _INFORM_ENABLE Page 187 PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL Page 188 PERIODIC_INFORM TIME Page 188 CON_REQ_USER_ID Page 188 CON_REQ_PASS Page 189 ANNEX CG STUN_ENABLE Page 189 ANNEX CG STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 189 ANNEX_G STUN_SERV_PORT Page 190 ANNEX_G STUN _USER_ID Page 190 ANNEX_G STUN_PASS Page 190 ANNEX_G STUN MAX KEEP ALIVE Page 190 ANNEX_G STUN MIN KEEP ALIVE Page 191 UDP_CON_REQ ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT Page 191 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface Network Settings Category Parameter Name Ref IP Settings CONNECTION _TYPE Page 191 HOST_NAME Page 192 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Page 192 STATIC_IP_A
134. Panasonic Administrator Guide SIP Phone moai KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 lt KX UT248 gt Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version 01 250 or later In this manual the suffix of each model number is omitted unless necessary Document Version 2013 03 Introduction Introduction Outline This Administrator Guide provides detailed information on the configuration and management of this unit Audience This Administrator Guide contains explanations about the installation maintenance and management of the unit and is aimed at network administrators and phone system dealers Technical descriptions are included in this guide Prior knowledge of networking and VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol is required Related Documentation Getting Started Briefly describes basic information about the installation of the unit Operating Instructions Describes information about the installation and operation of the unit Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at http www panasonic com sip for users in the United States http panasonic net pcc support sipphone for users in all other countries areas Technical Support When technical support is required contact your phone system dealer Open
135. Parameter No E E 135 Label Name No E EE 136 Tone leie EE 136 Dial Re 136 Tone Frequencies uuuennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnpnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 136 Reie ln 137 BUSY En EE 137 Tone Frequencies cccccseccseeeeeeeeeseseesseessseseeeeeecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesenessaeenaaes 137 Tone JEE 138 Ge ele le WE E 138 Tone Frequencies ccccccecsseenseeesessssessessseseeeeeeeeceeeccseeeesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesenessaeesaaes 138 Tone MINOS ene ene ener Panne eer ees 138 Stutter LONG ya ses en EE 139 Tone Frequencies sesesseseertttttttttttttttttttter tree rASAEEEAAAAEEEEEEEEEAEEEEEEEEEEE EENEN EEEnEEEennt 139 Jr 139 Reorder Tone cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeecaaaeeeaaeaeaeaaaaaaaeeeseeeseseeeeeseaeeeaaeaesaageesseeeees 139 Tone Frequencies ccccceccseesseeesessseessessseeeeeceecseeecseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeaeenaaes 139 Tone EE ee 140 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents 4 6 5 Telephone Settings SORPRARERRGDEREDEBITDEERRERRRNEREUELDEEFEPEDEREEESPFEDERREBBEESEPLUEFTLDEREUEEPLDEUENBEUEREEPLEEIILER 140 4 6 5 1 Telephane Sellings E 140 Key Click E 140 Extension PIN EEN 141 Number Matching Lower Digit 141 Number Matching Upper KL EE 141 4 6 6 Import Phonebook 141 4 6 6 1 Import PHONEDOOK E 142 FileName tisina a aa a e ea A Ea E nn sn ns sn nn 142 4 6 7 Export Phonebook e ik nenn Sn E EE E OE E a EE E Aa
136. Port Settings DNS2_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for your phone system dealer Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string 5 4 3 Ethernet Port Settings VLAN_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e You should specify Y for only one of LLDP_ENABLE VLAN_ENABLE Or IEEE8021X ENABLE If Y is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X_ENABLE gt VLAN_ENABLE gt LLDP_ENABLE Therefore if Y is specified for both VLAN_ENABLE and LLDP_ENABLE the VLAN related settings are used Value Range e Y Enable N Disable Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable VLAN Page 84 VLAN ID Ip PHONE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit Note e This setting is available only when both NW_SETTING ENABLE and IEEE802 1X_ENABLE KX UT248 only are set to N Value Range 14094 Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference IP Phone VLAN ID Page 85 196 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 3 Ethernet Port Settin
137. Provisioning san ae ana taaa aeaa daaa aeann esaa 38 2 2 1 e e Ce E le e KEE 38 2 2 2 Protocols for Provisioning EE 38 2 2 3 E e le Leier 38 2 2 4 Downloading Configuration Files 2 era nee denen en teens 40 2 2 5 Provisioning Server Setting E E TE 43 2 2 6 ee anp E E a 44 2 3 Priority of Setting MethodS siiciaisiacssecssitenciiecstunsnasnedancracnwuistcddnsnuinatnenGdaeendinacuseseidnohinicnineed 45 2 4 Configuration File Specifications seveeeirutteEECSESSSEESESENEEEEEEEKEREEESNESEEEERENEEEEEEESEEESEEEEERESeEd 46 2 5 Configuration File Examples icsenssisdesinicicennssidandanenierensueranasenscsenduiaannentawesdsednstrnadunadadenicnert 47 2 5 1 Examples of Codec Settings en een een enigeiet 48 2 5 2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeaaseeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 49 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 222000000000000000n 50 3 Phone User Interface Programming ee KEREN EEN 55 3 1 Phone User Interface Programming cccccccsssessessseecseeeeeeeeeeeeesessecceeeeeeeeesensenneees 56 3 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commande cece eeentneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 3 1 2 Phonebook EL EE 56 3 1 3 TerminalM mber det EE 56 3 1 4 Reset Web IDIP ASS EE 57 3 1 5 Sound Quality KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT 136 only asasan 57 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 3 Table of Contents 4 4 Web User Interface Programming
138. Source Software Notice Parts of this product use open source software For details about the open source software see the Operating Instructions Trademarks e Microsoft Excel Internet Explorer Outlook and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners e Microsoft product screen shot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation NOTES e The screen shots shown in this guide are provided for reference only and may differ from the screens displayed on your PC 2 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 initial Setup E 17 1 1 SEAU o EE 18 1 1 1 Factory DetaultS E 18 1 1 2 Language Selection for the EE 18 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup cccccccccccneceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeaaeeaaanaaaa 18 1 1 4 Overview of Programming rer 20 1 1 5 Phone User Interface Programming 22 ccccccsesessesecceeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeceeeeseneeseeenneneseeees 20 1 1 5 1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming 000 20 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming ccccccccescssescceeseneeseeescacaceesecnesnineeeesenstseseaneneneeess 21 1 1 6 1 Password for Web User Interf
139. Specifies the DNS query method as parallel or sequential Value Range e Parallel N Sequential Note e Ifsetto y the unit sends out all DNS queries at the same time The first DNS reply will be accepted and used by the unit e If set to N the unit sends DNS queries sequentially The unit sends a request to the DNS server with the highest priority for a preprogrammed time period 5 seconds When the timer expires the unit sends a request to the DNS server with the second priority Default Value Y DNS_PRIORITY Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the priority of the DNS server Value Range Y DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR have first priority N DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR have no priority Note e If set to Y the DNS servers specified in DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR will be queried first If the queries fail the DNS server specified by the user DHCP or static will be queried e If set to N the DNS server specified by the user DHCP or static will be queried first If the query fails the DNS servers specified in DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ ADDR will be queried Default Value N DNS1_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for your phone system dealer Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 195 5 4 3 Ethernet
140. Synchronization by NTP 100 Enable VLAN 84 Encryption 44 148 Encryption Key 44 183 184 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time 103 Entering Characters 25 Error Codes 294 Ethernet Link Status LAN Port 73 Ethernet Link Status PC Port 73 Ethernet Port Settings 81 159 196 Export Button 274 Export Phonebook 142 274 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook 277 Extension PIN 141 EXTENSION_PIN 224 External RTP Port 93 F Factory Defaults 18 29 30 57 Factory Setting 29 File Name 142 148 Firewall and Router Setup 27 FIRM_FILE_PATH 178 FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO 178 FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE 177 FIRM_VERSION 178 Firmware File URL 147 Firmware Maintenance 146 288 Firmware Server 31 288 Firmware Update 31 146 177 287 288 Firmware Update Settings 157 177 288 Firmware Version 72 FIRSTDIGIT_TIM 206 Administrator Guide 305 Index Flash Hook Event 126 Flash Recall Button 125 FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE 245 FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE 245 FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx 227 FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx 227 FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx 228 FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx 227 Flexible Button Settings 135 162 227 283 Flexible Buttons 282 283 FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n 244 G G722 Enable 120 G722 Priority 120 G726 32 Enable 121 G726 32 Priority 121 G729A Enable 121 G729A Priority 122 Global Address Detection 29 90 Global IP Address 92 H Header Value for Resync Event 151 HOLD_ALARM_FRQ 217 HOLD_ALARM_GAI
141. T248 Software File Version 01 xxx MAINTENANCE_WEB_RESET_ON_STARTUP Page 186 Changed Contents 5 5 4 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings ADJDATA_GAIN Page 225 4 3 2 2 LLDP Settings Enable LLDP Page 83 4 3 2 3 VLAN Settings Enable VLAN Page 84 4 3 3 1 IEEE802 1X Settings Enable IEEE802 1X Page 86 5 4 3 Ethernet Port Settings VLAN_ENABLE Page 196 5 4 4 IEEE 802 1X Settings KX UT248 only EEE8021X_ENABLE Page 198 5 4 9 LLDP MED Settings LLDP_ENABLE Page 204 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 301 9 1 4 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version 01 xxx 302 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Index Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 303 Index Numerics 1 30 126 A Access Level 23 60 Access Levels IDs and Passwords 21 23 Accessing the Web User Interface 23 ACS_PASS 187 ACS_URL 187 ACS_USER_ID 187 ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n 267 ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n 267 ADD_USER_PHONE_n 262 ADJDATA_ATT 226 ADJDATA_GAIN 225 ADMIN_ID 169 ADMIN_PASS 169 Administrator Password 96 ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE 189 ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE 191 ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR 189 ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT 190 ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID 190 Application Authentication 94 Application Bootup URL 143 Application initial URL 144 Application Port 94 Application Settings 94 143 A
142. TIP USER AGENT 2er ee 200 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY EE 200 CEG BOOT CERTIEIGATE DATH o sssisssisssieesieesrieseieeriesriesriesriessrtssressrresrrsnreesrens 201 Time Adjust SUI E 201 Ree 201 TIME ND essen nennen ee en 202 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 11 Table of Contents 12 TIME SOUR MINDY EE 202 5 4 7 S TUN SUNS cestode asc cece cea cee E E aces eee 202 SEENEN ADDR ansehen death ee ee EES 202 STUN Ge Eege 202 SIUN 2NDSERV ADDR deet bett egen eege 203 STUN 2NDSERV POR RE 203 5 4 8 Miscellaneous Network Settings ccccccccncccteneesctesesesececeecsnentaenssaeendeennensesdnneensceees 203 NW SETHNG TE 203 CUSTOM WEBPAGE EE 203 5 4 9 DFID Sie a2 ae ee 204 LEDP ENABLE EE 204 LEE 204 LLDP VEAN ID 2er ae een eben dire niederen 204 LLDP VLAN PRIPO nee ee ee 205 5 5 Telephone Settings ae 205 5 5 1 Call ele Eine EE 205 Vi SUBSCRIBE ENABLE smitandi iiiar nain irnek aio enaisi 205 CONFERENCE SERVER URI 2322 205 FIRS TBIG AMM E 206 INTDIGITZIIM see ee 206 MACRODIGIT TI ae ee ee ee erteilen 206 INTERNATIONAL AEGESS CODE Ma na cates 206 COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE EE 207 NATIONAL ACCESS CODE nee nie 207 DEFAULT DINE SELECT nes este ste riesen 207 DATAJUNE MODE ege 207 NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT WE 208 TACK EE 208 AROLD PACKAGE vie ea hee Eegen te 208 AHOLD Te E UE 208 AUTO ANS eelere Ee alas 209 RINGING OFFSET TING BINA BE ea 209 AUTO CALC AOUD E 209 REDIALREY CALLLOG ENABLE 22222 209 ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE E 210 K
143. TP Authentication Detection E EE eech Authentication Password Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy OYes No Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port 8080 1 65535 Save Cancel 4 3 4 1 HTTP Client Settings HTTP Version Description Selects which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication Value Range e HTTP 1 0 e HTTPM 1 Note e For this unit it is strongly recommended that you select HTTP 1 0 However if the HTTP server does not function well with HTTP 1 0 try changing the setting HTTP 1 1 Default Value HTTP 1 0 Configuration File Reference HTTP_VER Page 200 HTTP User Agent Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP requests 88 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 4 HTTP Client Settings Value Range Max 40 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty If mac is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this field it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Configuration File Reference
144. ULT ENARLE siiseieeieeiiseiesiessresrresrressrsrrsrresrresren 245 FLASH RECALL TERMINATE l s seiseeieseissiiesiesiresissretsresiresrtsressrtsrtsrrtsrtsrtsrrerrren 245 FCASHHOOK CONTENT TYPE ee eege nennen taste 245 VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE E 246 AOLD SOUND PATH E EE 246 14 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents SE 246 SIP USER AGENT 2 een ee 246 PRONE NUMBER Hinzu 247 SIP URL E 247 LINE PEIN E E 248 PROFILE ENABLEN E 248 SP AUTA ah seeks Series ter ERBEN e EHE ENEESEURDETSCEEERPERENTEERLTERLOPENSPEIERESUSPEEREERTREEFRUDEENERNS 248 SIPA PASS A een ee er 249 SIP SRC PORI M NEE 249 SIP PRXY ADOR EE 249 SIP PRX Y PORI E 249 SIP RGSIR ADDR N EE 250 SIP eegene gees 250 oe QIAN I cece crease esc ea ee 250 REG HE Ge ee nennen 251 REG INTERVAL RA TE N an nee nee 251 elle E TE M tristaniana DENE SPERTTTERTERTELUEBEBEEFRLELUEEPLENEPERESTPREREEER 251 SIP SOON IMI INO D WE 251 DSCP SIR I EE 252 SIP 2NDPROXY ADDROW see 252 Te A FOREN EE 252 SIP 2NDRGS IR ADDR Eege 253 SIP _2NDRGSIR_ PORN E 253 SIP MER TIN EE 253 SIP HUMER EE 253 SIP UMER E 254 SIP_FOVR NORSP T zungen een 254 SF MAX EE 255 SIP RE FRE SHER AM E 255 SIP DNSSRV SIENA EE 255 SIP UDP SRV PREFIX T WEE 256 SIP TCP SRV KE WEE 256 SIP Lauer ENABLE E 256 SIP INVITE EXPIRE EE 257 SIP 18X RIX INTVE Tine aaia iadaa aana eE ra Eaki 257 SIP PRSNC ADDR IN nee een ee 257 IPP PING PORI EE 258 SIP 2NDPRSNC ADDR N een 258 SP 2NDPRSNE
145. URI_PORT_n Page 260 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n Page 260 SUB_RTX_INTVL_n Page 260 REG_RTX_INTVL_n Page 261 SIP_P PREFERRED ID n Page 261 SIP_PRIVACY_n Page 261 ADD_USER_PHONE_n Page 262 SDP_USER_ID_n Page 262 SUB_INTERVAL RATE n Page 262 166 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 2 1 Configuration File Parameters Category Parameter Name Ref SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n Page 262 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n Page 263 SIP_TRANSPORT_n Page 263 SIP_ANM DISPNAME_n Page 263 SIP_ANM USERNAME_n Page 264 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME n Page 264 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n Page 264 SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n Page 265 SIP_CONTACT ON ACK n Page 265 SIP_TIMER B_n Page 265 SIP_TIMER D o Page 265 SIP_TIMER Pn Page 266 SIP_TIMER Rn Page 266 SIP_TIMER_J_n Page 266 ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n Page 267 ADD_EXPIRES HEADER n Page 267 SIP_HOLD _HOLDRECEIVE_n Page 267 SIP_ADD DIVERSION n Page 267 SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND Page 268 SIP_RESPONSE_ CODE CALL REJECT Page 268 SIP_FOVR_MODE_n Page 268 SIP_FOVR_DURATION n Page 268 SIP_ADD ROUTE _n Page 269 SIP_403 REG SUB RTX_n Page 269 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface 5 2 General Information on the Configuration Files 5 2 1 Configuration File Parameters The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below The information includes parameter name as the title o
146. User Interface Reference Timer F Page 112 SIP_TIMER_H_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_H 1 SIP_TIMER H 2 SIP_TIMER_H 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value of SIP timer H wait time for ACK reception in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 Web User Interface Reference Timer H Page 112 SIP_TIMER_J_n 266 Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER J_1 SIP_TIMER J 2 SIP_TIMER_J 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value of SIP timer J wait time for non INVITE request resending in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 0 250 64000 Default Value 5000 Web User Interface Reference Timer J Page 113 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n Parameter Name Example ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_1 ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_2 ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whetherto add the attribute transport udp to the SIP header URI Value Range e Y Add Transport UDP e Nw Do not add Transport UDP Default Value N ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n Parameter Name Example ADD_EXPIRES HEADER 1 ADD EXPIRES HEADER 2 ADD_EXPIRES HEADER 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add
147. Value N 5 5 2 Tone Settings DIAL_TONE1_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of Dial Tone 1 using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 136 DIAL_TONE1_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of Dial Tone 1 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 211 5 5 2 Tone Settings Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE1_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 1 is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE1_ TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of Dial Tone 1 using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 0 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 137 DIAL_TONE2 FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in
148. _STUN_MIN KEEP AL Page 191 umKeepAlivePeriod IVE TR 106 Device ManagementServer UDPConne UDP_CON_REQ ADDR_NOTIFY_ Page 191 ctionRequestAddressNotificationLimit LIMIT TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile RTP_PTIME Page 238 1 Line 1 Codec List 1 PacketizationPeriod TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 n Line 1 Codec List x Enable TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 n Line 1 Codec List x Priority TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile RTCP_INTVL_n Page 236 n RTP RTCP TxRepeatinterval TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile RTP_PORT_MIN Page 237 1 RTP LocalPortMin TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile RTP_PORT_MAX Page 237 1 RTP LocalPortMax TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile DSCP_RTP_n Page 235 n RTP DSCPMark TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile RTCP_ENABLE_n Page 238 n RTP RTCP Enable TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile PROFILE ENABLEn Page 248 n Enable Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 51 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 Parameter Name Requirement Ref TR 069 Parameter Configuration File Parameter TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile OUTBANDDTMF_n Page 239 EME MENGN DTMF _ RELAY n Page 240 TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile DIAL PLAN n Page 242 n DigitMap TR 104 De
149. ace Programming ss nn nn nenn nennen nennen 21 1 1 6 2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming 00 21 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface 222 sz s4424444044040400R onen 22 1 1 6 4 Accessing the Web User Interface 22 22 4 4susssm44n00nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnnnnnnnnen 23 1 1 7 Other Network dl CG 27 1 1 7 1 Firewall and Router Setup u0snssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenne nenn nsnnnn 27 1 1 7 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup EE 28 1 1 7 3 Global Address Detection er neuen 29 1 2 Reset and Firmware Update 44444444444440RRRR nn nn nennen nme nnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnn nn 29 1 2 1 Eeer 29 1 2 1 1 Resetting to Factory Default Factory Setting rrsrssenenenennnnnnnnnn anna nn anna nenn 29 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Network Settings IP Reset ursss444nnnannnannanananannnnnnnnnnnnnnn 30 1 2 1 3 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web SUING EE 30 1 2 2 Firmware Update c scecseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeceneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 31 2 General Information on Provisioning 44unssannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 33 2 1 Pre PrOVISIONING WEE 34 2 1 1 What iS IP lee 1 ne KEE 34 2 1 2 Pre provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses RBB RR Rennen 35 2 1 3 Server for Pre provisioning E 35 2 1 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example EE 35 2 2
150. age 84 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only VLAN Settings Enable VLAN v Page 84 IP Phone _ VLAN ID Page 85 Priority Page 85 PC E VLAN ID KX UT123 v Page 85 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Priority KX UT123 v Page 85 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only IEEE802 1X IEEE802 1X Settings Enable IEEE802 1X v Page 86 nd IEEE802 1X Authentication Protocol v Page 87 deg Authentication Authentication ID v Page 87 Authentication Password v Page 87 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U HTTP Client HTTP Client Settings HTTP Version v Page 88 SCH HTTP User Agent v Page 88 HTTP Authentication Authentication ID v Page 89 Authentication Password v Page 89 Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy v Page 89 Proxy Server Address v Page 90 Proxy Server Port v Page 90 Global Address Global Address Detection Method v Page 90 Basen Darm Detection Interval v Page 91 STUN Server STUN Server Address v Page 91 STUN Server Port v Page 91 Static NAPT Global IP Address Global IP Address v Page 92 SEI Enable Global IP Line 1 Line x v Page 93 Address Usage per Line External RTP Port Channel 1 25 v Page 93 Application Application Settings Application Port v Page 94 SES Enable Application v Page 94 Application
151. all Hold feature on this line Value Range e yY Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold e N Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold Note e If set to Y the c 0 0 0 0 syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re INVITE message to hold the call e If set to N the c x x x x syntax will be set in SDP Default Value H Web User Interface Reference Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 Page 120 DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of the DTMF signal in milliseconds Value Range 60 200 Default Value 180 DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in milliseconds between DTMF signals Value Range 60 200 Default Value 90 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 241 5 7 1 Call Control Settings 5 7 Line Settings 5 7 1 Call Control Settings DISPLAY_NAME_n Parameter Name Example DISPLAY NAME 1 DISPLAY _NAME 2 DISPLAY NAME 6 Value Format String Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party s phone when you make a call Value Range Max 24 characters Note e You can use Unicode characters for this setting Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Display Name Page 127 VM_NUMBER_n Parameter Name Example VM_NUMBER_1 VM_NUMBER_2 VM_NUMBER_6 Value Format String Descript
152. alue Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Address Page 107 SIP_PRXY_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_PORT_1 SIP_PRXY_PORT_2 SIP_PRXY_PORT_6 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 249 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Port Page 108 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Registrar Server Address Page 107 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1 SIP_RGSTR_PORT 2 SIP_RGSTR_PORT 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User In
153. ame Example SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_ 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the subscription remains valid This value is set in the Expires header of the SUBSCRIBE request Value Range 1 4294967295 Default Value 3600 SUB_RTX_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example SUB_RTX_INTVL_1 SUB_RTX_INTVL_2 SUB_RTX_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure server no reply or error reply Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 10 REG_RTX_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example REG_RTX_INTVL_1 REG_RTX_INTVL_2 REG_RTX_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the REGISTER request when a registration results in failure server no reply or error reply Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 10 SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n Parameter Name Example SIP_P PREFERRED _ID_1 SIP_P_ PREFERRED ID 2 SIP_P PREFERRED ID 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the P Preferred Identity header to SIP messages Value Range e Y Add the P
154. an be changed from a User account A separate password is assigned to each account For details see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Notice e You should manage the passwords carefully and change them regularly 1 1 6 2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network various menus and settings are displayed You can change the language used for displaying these setting items Because the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the unit you must set the languages for each independently For details see 4 4 1 Web Language Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 21 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Recommended Environment This unit supports the following specifications HTTP Version HTTP 1 0 RFC 1945 HTTP 1 1 RFC 2616 Authentication Method Digest or Basic The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments Operating System Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 7 operating system Web Browser Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8 web browser Language recommended English Opening Closing the Web Port 22 To access the Web user interface you must open the unit s Web port beforehand For de
155. an be performed regardless of this setting e Firmware updates using TR 069 can be performed regardless of this setting Value Range e Y Enable firmware updates N Disable firmware updates Default Value H Web User Interface Reference Enable Firmware Update Page 146 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 177 5 3 4 Firmware Update Settings FIRM_VERSION Value Format String Description Specifies the firmware version of the unit Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range 00 000 15 999 Default Value Empty string FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to perform a firmware update manual or perform the firmware update without asking the user automatic when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note e This setting is available only when FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE is set to Y e Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range e Y Enable automatic firmware update e N Disable automatic firmware update Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Update Type Page 147 FIRM_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored Note e This setting is available only when FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE is set to Y
156. ange Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL Page 229 4 6 8 4 Talking URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_TALKING_URL Page 230 4 6 8 5 Making call URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call to check for XML data 144 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 8 Application Settings Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL Page 230 4 6 8 6 Call log URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL Page 230 4 6 8 7 Idling URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_IDLING_URL Page 230 4 6 8 8 Network Phone Book URL URL Description Specifies the URL th
157. aracters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value Empty string CFG_FILE_KEY3 Value Format String Description Specifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note e Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e3c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte characters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value Empty string CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files Value Range 128 Default Value 128 CFG_CYCLIC Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files 184 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range e Y Enable periodic synchronization of configuration files e N Disable periodic synchronization of configuration files Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Cyclic Auto Resync Page 150 CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in minutes between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files Value Range 1 40320 Default Valu
158. arameter List 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming For details about each parameter see the reference pages listed For details about configuration file specifications see 2 4 Configuration File Specifications System Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Login Account Settings ADMIN_ID Page 169 ADMIN Pass Page 169 USER_ID Page 170 USER_PASS Page 170 System Time Settings TIME ZONE Page 170 DST ENABLE Page 171 DST OFFSET Page 171 DST_START_MONTH Page 172 DST_START_ORDINAL_ DAY Page 172 DST_START_DAY_OF WEEK Page 172 DST_START_TIME Page 173 DST_STOP_MONTH Page 173 DST_STOP_ORDINAL DAY Page 174 DST_STOP_DAY OF _ WEEK Page 174 DST_STOP_TIME Page 174 LOCAL _TIME_ZONE_POSIX Page 175 Syslog Settings SYSLOG EVENT SIP Page 175 SYSLOG _EVENT_CFG Page 176 SYSLOG EVENT VOIP Page 176 SYSLOG _EVENT_TEL Page 176 SYSLOG ADDR Page 176 SYSLOG PORT Page 177 SYSLOG _RTPSMLY_INTVL_n Page 177 156 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Firmware Update Settings FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE Page 177 FIRM_VERSION Page 178 FIRM_UPGRADE AUTO Page 178 FIRM FILE PATH Page 178 Provisioning Settings O
159. arious call features that are common to all lines Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network Web Port Close Telephone Call Control Line 4 Mail Server Conference Server URI Inter digit Timeout Timer for Dial Plan International Call Prefix Country Calling Code National Access Code Default Line for Outgoing Flash Recall Button Flash Hook Event Directed Call Pickup System Maintenance VoIP Telephone Call Control Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice OYes No 5 seconds Ta 5 seconds 1 wi Terminate O Flash Hook Signal O flashhook Call Rejection Phone Numbers a amp _ TF 4 6 1 1 Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server Description Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Configuration File Reference VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Page 205 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 123 4 6 1 Call Control Conference Server URI Description Specifies the URI for a conference server which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip conference example com Note e InaSIP URI the user part conference in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters e A
160. at Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received For details refer to RFC 4028 Value Range 0 60 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 Page 113 SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n Parameter Name Example SIP_SESSION METHOD 1 SIP_SESSION METHOD 2 SIP_SESSION METHOD 6 Value Format Integer Description Selects the refreshing method of SIP sessions Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 251 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range 0 2 O relNVITE 1 UPDATE 2 AUTO Default Value 0 DSCP_SIP_n Parameter Name Example DSCP_SIP_1 DSCP_SIP_2 DSCP_SIP_6 Value Format Integer Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to SIP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference SIP Packet QoS DSCP Page 113 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR 2 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP proxy server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted deci
161. at is accessed when the phonebook is accessed to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_URL Page 231 4 6 8 9 Network Phone Book URL Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the network phonebook server Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 145 4 7 1 Firmware Maintenance Value Range Max 127 characters except A lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID Page 231 Authentication Password Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the network phonebook server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS Page 231 4 7 Maintenance This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Maintenance tab 4 7 1 Firmware Maintenance This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically or manually Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Firmware Maintenance Web Port Close Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update Yes ONo Local Firmware Update Update Type Maintenance Fi
162. ate manually using Web user interface programming For details about the local firmware update see 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update To manually update the firmware 1 In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab and then click Local Firmware Update 2 Click Browse select the folder where the firmware file is stored and specify the firmware file on your PC 3 Click Update Firmware Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 289 7 4 Local Firmware Update 290 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 8 Troubleshooting This section provides information about troubleshooting Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 291 8 1 Troubleshooting 8 1 Troubleshooting If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section disconnect the unit from the AC outlet then connect the AC adaptor again If using PoE disconnect the LAN cable then connect the LAN cable again General Use Problem Cause Solution cannot hear a dial tone Network settings may not be correct Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all the equipment First shut down your modem router hub unit and PC Then turn the devices back on one ata time in this order modem router hub unit PC e Ifyou cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC check to see if your phone system is having connection issues in your area e Check the VoIP status in the Web user inte
163. ber as any of the port numbers in Channel 1 25 in 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port if they are configured In addition you cannot specify a port number that is 1 greater than a port number specified in Channel 1 25 e The available channel number varies depending on the type of the unit being used s The SIP port number for each line must be unique e You cannot specify the same port number as the port number specified in Web Server Port in 4 4 4 1 Web Server Settings Default Value 5060 for Line 1 5070 for Line 2 5080 for Line 3 5090 for Line 4 5100 for Line 5 5110 for Line 6 was a SS aS Configuration File Reference SIP_SRC_PORT_n Page 249 4 5 2 6 SIP Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 109 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x Configuration File Reference SIP_AUTHID_n Page 248 Authentication Password Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PASS_n Page 249 4 5 2 7 DNS Enable DNS SRV lookup
164. ble only when NW_SETTING_ENABLE is set to N e You should specify Y for only one of LLDP_ENABLE VLAN_ENABLE Or IEEE8021X ENABLE If Y is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X_ENABLE gt VLAN_ENABLE gt LLDP_ENABLE Therefore if Y is specified for both VLAN_ENABLE and LLDP_ENABLE the VLAN related settings are used Value Range e Y Enable N Disable Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable IEEE802 1X Page 86 IEEE8021X_AUTH_PRTCL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the authentication method used with the IEEE 802 1X protocol Note e This setting is available only when VLAN_ENABLE is set to N Value Range e 1 PEAP 0 EAP MD5 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Authentication Protocol Page 87 IEEE8021X_USER_ID Value Format String 198 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 5 HTTP Settings Description Specifies the authentication ID required for IEEE 802 1X authentication Note e This setting is available only when VLAN_ENABLE is set to N Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 87 IEEE8021X_USER_PASS Value Format String Descri
165. ble this function from the Web user interface The following operations will be prohibited Pre provisioning Provisioning at startup Provisioning at regular intervals Provisioning by sending a NOTIFY message In the configuration file Add the line PROVISION _ENABLE N s In the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select No for Enable Provisioning To enable provisioning again in the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select Yes for Enable Provisioning 2 2 5 Provisioning Server Setting Example This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units with configuration files The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this example Conditions Item Description Setting Provisioning server FQDN prov example com Units MAC addresses e 0080F0111111 e 0080F0222222 URL of the configuration files Configure the following 2 settings either by pre provisioning or through the Web user interface The values of both settings must be the same CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http prov example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg CFG MASTER FILE PATH http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg Directory on the provisioning server containing the configuration files
166. c Content Length 0 2 2 6 Encryption Secure Provisioning Methods In order to perform provisioning securely there are 2 methods for transferring configuration files securely 44 between the unit and the server Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system Method 1 Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files Unencrypted I Encrypted configuration configuration gt A file file CFG_FILE KEY1 CFG_FILE KEY1 To use this method an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files A preset encryption key unique to each unit an encryption key set by your phone system dealer etc is used for the encryption When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file it will decrypt the file using the same encryption key and then configure the settings automatically Method 2 Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS This method uses SSL which is commonly used on the Internet to transfer configuration files between the unit and server For more secure communication you can use a root certificate Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 3 Priority of Setting Methods Notice To avoid redundant data transfer over the network important data such as the encryption key used to encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL should be configured through pre provisioning as much as possible e Itis recommended that y
167. c to each line The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows e KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 126 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x e KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 e KX UT248 1 6 Panasonic KX UT248 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Call Control Line 1 Telephone Call Control Display Name Voice Mail Access Number Enable Shared Call OYes No Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward OYes No Resource List URI Flexible Button Settings Tone Settings Dial Plan Dial Plan max 1000 columns Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Yes ONo Block Caller ID OYes No Block Anonymous Call OYes No Do Not Disturb OYes No Call Forward Call Forward OYes No 4 6 2 1 Call Control Display Name Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party s phone when you make a call Value Range Max 24 characters Note e You can use Unicode characters for this setting Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference DISPLAY_NAME_n Page 242 Voice Mail Access Number Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value Not stored Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 127 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x
168. ce NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT Page 222 4 6 6 Import Phonebook This screen allows you to import phonebook data from a PC to the specified unit For details see 6 1 1 Import Export Operation Note Ifthe existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported entry the imported entry is not added as a new entry e When you begin transferring the phonebook data the Now Processing File Data screen is displayed and the screen is periodically reloaded Depending on your Web browser the screen might not reload Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 141 4 6 7 Export Phonebook automatically and you will need to click the text HERE before the timer expires in order for the import operation to function properly Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Import Phonebook Telephone Import Phonebook Fie Name Es un Import Phonebook Export Phonebook Application Settings 4 6 6 1 Import Phonebook File Name Description Specifies the path of the TSV Tab separated Value file to import from the PC Value Range No limitation Note There are no limitations for the field entry However it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error Default Value Not stored 4 6 7 Export Phonebook This scre
169. ceive the TFTP server address or FQDN from the DHCP server Note e The unit will try to download configuration files through the TFTP server the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in the option number 66 field Value Range e Y Enable option 66 N Disable option 66 Default Value H OPTION66_REBOOT Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the unit restarts automatically after pre provisioning has completed successfully using DHCP server option 66 For details see 2 1 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 179 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range e y Restart automatically e Nw Do not restart automatically Default Value N PROVISION_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system Note Downloading configuration files using TR 069 can be performed regardless of this setting Value Range e Y Enable configuration file download N Disable configuration file download Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Enable Provisioning Page 149 CEG STANDARD ELE PATH 180 Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file which is used when every unit nee
170. change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 131 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Unconditional Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming calls to Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 32 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty if Unconditional Enable Call Forward is set to Yes Default Value Not stored Busy Enable Call Forward Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when the line is in use Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting e Ifyou have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server but the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destinat
171. cifies the length of time in seconds within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires after the last key was pressed dialing will start Value Range 1 15 Default Value 5 Web User Interface Reference Inter digit Timeout Page 124 MACRODIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits when a T or t has been entered in the dial plan Value Range 1 15 Default Value 5 Web User Interface Reference Timer for Dial Plan Page 124 INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS CODE 206 Value Format String Description Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first symbol when the phone number for incoming international calls contains Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note No other characters are allowed Default Value Empty string is deleted Web User Interface Reference International Call Prefix Page 124 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 1 Call Control Settings COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE Value Format String Description Specifies the country area calling code to be used for comparative purposes when dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a symbol Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 Default Value Empty string
172. cking up Phonebook Data You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss or for use when exchanging the unit Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 1 Phonebook Import and Export Importing the Same Phonebook Data to other Units You can export the phonebook data created on a unit to a PC and then import it into other units Phonebook Phonebook Microsoft data Excel Import Export File Format The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is TSV When importing or exporting using Microsoft Excel CSV Comma separated Value is generally used as the file format A phonebook entry in the unit has 9 fields An entry in the phonebook data is represented in text as record ID lt TAB gt name lt TAB gt nickname lt TAB gt phone number lt TAB gt phone number lt TAB gt phone number lt TAB gt phone number lt TAB gt phone number lt TAB gt ringtone lt line break gt The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF 16 encoding with a BOM and little endian byte ordering When you save the text file it must be saved using the same format or the text might become garbled Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 273 6 1 1 Import Export Operation Phonebook Data in Text Format O O vo E ee d d KE J Toe er ee 11234001 1234002 11234003 11234004 Aaron MacDowel Barbara Nicolls
173. consecutive delimiters as one E Semicolon E Comma El Space Mother Text qualifier Z Data preview d aron MacDowel 1234001 E arbara Nicolls 1234002 E arl O Brien 1234003 jorothy Parker 1234004 276 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 1 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook 6 On the Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 window select all columns in Data preview select Text in Column data format and then click Finish The TSV file will be opened r N Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 re This screen lets you select each column and set Column data format the Data Format De General converts numeric values to numbers date Text values to dates and all remaining values to text Date MDY E Do not import column skip l Advanced Data preview canei lt k Note e Phone numbers must be treated as text strings Otherwise a 0 at the beginning of a phone number might disappear when exported To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit 1 After editing the phonebook entries click Office Button and then Save As 2 Enter a file name in File name and select Unicode Text in Save as type The file will be saved in UTF 16 little endian with a BOM Fields will be separated by tabs 3 Click Save A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed 4 Click Yes The file will be saved as a Unicode text f
174. correct for registration to the SIP server Checking the Status of the Unit You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming see 4 2 2 Network Status and 4 2 3 VoIP Status or by looking at system logs gt see 5 3 3 Syslog Settings sent from the unit To check the setting status in the Web user interface 1 Click the Status tab and then click Network Status to check the network settings 2 Check the status displayed 3 Click VoIP Status to check the VoIP settings 4 Check the status displayed To send the system logs of specified events to the syslog server 1 Set the following parameters to specify your PC Windows Linux operating system etc as the syslog server SYSLOG ADDR Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server SYSLOG PORT Specifies the port number of the syslog server 2 Set the following parameters to log specific events SYSLOG EVENT SIP Logs SIP related syslog events SYSLOG EVENT CFG Logs syslog events regarding configuration 294 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 8 1 Troubleshooting SYSLOG EVENT VOIP Logs syslog events regarding VoIP operation Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 295 8 1 Troubleshooting 296 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 9 Appendix Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 297 9 1 1 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 025
175. d the limit of 537 bytes Empty lines Comment lines that start with Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence 44 bytes Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 5 Configuration File Examples 23 20 50 61 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 63 20 53 49 50 20 50 68 6F 6E 65 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46 6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 23 e To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance it is recommended that the configuration file starts with the comment line shown below Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE e Configuration files must end with an empty line Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX yyy XXX parameter name yyy parameter value The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks e A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed It will cause an error on the configuration file resulting in invalid provisioning Configuration Parameters e The unit supports multiple telephone lines For some parameters the value for each line must be specified independently A parameter name with the suffix _1 is the parameter for line 1 _2 for line 2 and so on Examples of setting the line phone number for accessing a voice mail server VM_NUMBER_ 1 for line 1 VM_NUMBER_ 2 for lin
176. delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 7 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than or equal to MIN_DELAY This value must be less than MAX_DELAY Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Initial Delay Page 119 RTP_PORT_MIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note e If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 25 in 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Range 1024 48750 even number only Note The value for this setting must be less than or equal to RTP_PORT_MAX 400 Changing this setting may affect the number of simultaneous calls that can be made Therefore when setting this parameter be aware that the maximum number of necessary ports can be calculated as shown below No of lines x No of channels x 2 x 10 No of terminals Default Value 16000 Web User Interface Reference Minimum RTP Port Number Page 115 RTP_PORT_MAX Value Format Integer Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 237 5 6 2 RTP Settings Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note e If port numbers are spec
177. der Value for Resync Event 2220 cc scsanecasdesseantenssecdisesstasanaisasiantscnnnectnccendes 151 4 7 4 Ee Ee ul le EE 151 4 7 4 1 Nittel Eege Eege 152 Management Server URL nass ee ee 152 4 7 4 2 Management Server Authentication umss444444444444444HHHR Rn nen nnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn nnnnnnannnnn 152 Authentication ID Ri len 152 Authentication Password 152 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 9 Table of Contents 10 4 7 5 PROS SU to RTE 152 4 7 6 E EE 153 5 Configuration File Programming cccccssseseeeeeeesesseeeeeesseeeeneneees 155 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List ccsccessesessseessscccscacecsnrsrtsacsasennsandsnenesacqaensninceriuanenens 156 5 2 General Information on the Configuration Files 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 167 5 2 1 Configuration File Ee EE 167 5 2 2 Characters Available for String Values 0 0 0 0 eeee ce eenene eee eeeeeeeeenaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeees 168 5 3 System SO E 169 5 3 1 Login Acco nt e CN 169 ADMIN E 169 ADMIN Eed 169 USERID E 170 USER EE 170 5 3 2 System lime Settings za ee 170 MME ZONE erae e E EEEE 170 IHR RE 171 AH TE EEN 171 DST START MONTH mere re een rene eee eer er realen 172 DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY E 172 DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK nee eee ee ee re 172 EO TP Wl 173 E E EE EE 173 DST_STOP DRDINAL KE 174 DST STOP DAY Eeer 174 IRCH e E E 174 LOCAL TIME ZONE IPOS E 173 5 3 3 Syslog 2 gt 1114 0 acre rec octiee a a E a
178. dial plan e If set to N the dialed number will be sent to the line even if the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the dial plan Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Page 129 SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example SHARED CALL ENABLE_ 1 SHARED CALL ENABLE 2 SHARED CALL ENABLE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server which is used to share one line among the units Note e You cannot set both SHARED CALL ENABLE n and FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n to Y at the same time e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range e yY Enable shared call e N Disable shared call Note e If setto Y the SIP server will control the line by using a shared call signaling method e If setto N the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable Shared Call Page 128 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 243 5 7 1 Call Control Settings FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example FWD_DND_SYNCHRO ENABLE 1 FWD_DND SYNCHRO ENABLE 2 FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward setti
179. ds different settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 500 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt scheme gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 128 characters lt password gt must be less than 128 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt scheme gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 245 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version If this URL ends with slash Config mac cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH http host dir becomes CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http nost dir Config mac cfg Default Value http provisioning e connecting net redirect conf mac cfg
180. e 10080 Web User Interface Reference Resync Interval Page 151 CFG_RTRY_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the period of time in minutes that the unit will retry checking for an update of the configuration files after a configuration file access error has occurred Note e This setting is available only when CFG CYCLIC is set to Y Value Range 1 1440 Default Value 30 CFG_RESYNC_TIME Value Format String Description Specifies the time hour minute that the unit checks for updates of configuration files Value Range 00 00 23 59 Note Ifthe value for this setting is any valid value other than an empty string the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed time and the settings specified in CFG_CYCLIC CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL and CFG_RTRY_INTVL are disabled e Ifthe value for this setting is an empty string downloading the configuration files at the fixed time are disabled Default Value Empty string Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 185 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings CFG_RESYNC_DURATION Value Format Integer Description Specifies the time period in minutes added to CFG_RESYNC_TIME to create a range within which the unit checks for updates of configuration files The check will be performed at a random time within this range Value Range 0 1439 Defau
181. e 2 VM_NUMBER_ 6 for line 6 Note s The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 KX UT248 1 6 The maximum length of a parameter name is 32 characters e The maximum length of a parameter value is 500 characters excluding double quotation marks e No space characters are allowed in the line except when the value includes a space character s Example DISPLAY NAME 1 John Smith valid DISPLAY NAME 1 John Smith invalid e Some parameter values can be specified as empty to set the parameter values to empty Example NTP_ADDR e The parameters have no order e Ifthe same parameter is specified in a configuration file more than once the value specified first is applied All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file You can ignore settings that already have the desired values Only change parameters as necessary 2 5 Configuration File Examples The following examples of configuration files are provided on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Simplified Example of the Configuration File e Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 47 2 5 1 Examples of Codec Settings 2 5 1 Examples of Codec Settings Setting the Codec Priority to 1 G 729A 2 G 726 32 3 PCMU 4 G 722 Codec Settings Enable G722 CODEC_ENABLEO_1
182. e 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFTS cccccsccccsscsesesscsssesecsescsusscscsecessssesesststeecicscsnsassesensseeees 232 XME INITIATE Yr E see ee 232 XML_INITIATE_KEY_FWDDND 0 eccccceseescscsesscessesesecscecsesesececsescsesesetessvaeesetensenes 232 XML INITIATE KEY FLASH 232 SML ERROR INFORMATION ss sissssisssieeieesiessrissressiesrresitssiesrtterenrtnsressresrersrrennrns 233 XMECATIPD POR E 233 5 6 VOIP Settings u ea ee 233 5 6 1 Codec Settings nn serien 233 CODEC G71 REQ sea ere nS nan ERE neu ee ei dia me Ea Ea Raa 233 GODEC 6729 RARAM a een 234 CODEC ENABLE E E 234 GODEC PRIORY EE 234 5 6 2 Nr E 235 DSCP RTP IN EE 235 DSCR RICP WEE 235 eB VE EE 236 MAX DELAY 2 WY EE 236 MIN DELAY e WEE 236 NOMEDELEAY M EE 237 SE ee 237 BIPZPORT MAX geet 237 E UE 238 RTCP ENABLE E 238 Le SEND BY SDP T E 239 RTP CLOSE ENABLE EE 239 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VolP Selings en a 239 IER REN d In EE 239 IRAN e E E EE 240 OUTBANDIOTIME VOL coccccscsseisdsceasscotdesslocsstensetaesehnncatsssatucssteonssteschtosstadcabivastavanatienes 240 I leren d Le EE 240 hc od RN d ER E 240 REC 2042 HOLD ENABLE M E 241 DTMF SIA RE 241 EES INT TA Zee ae ee 241 5 7 Line Settings en 242 5 7 1 Call Control Sellings Saas ee ee 242 DISPLAY NAME Teens ee er ee en Seele ee 242 VM NUMBER Miss 242 NIR DR E 242 DIAL PLAN_NOT_MATCH ENABLE N 243 SHARED _ CALL ENABLE mn 243 FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE mn 244 RESOURCELIST RE 244 CW ENABLE I 22er 245 RETURN vOL SET DEFA
183. e 234 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 163 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List 164 Category Parameter Name Ref RTP Settings DSCP_RTP_n Page 235 DSCP_RTCP_n Page 235 RTCP_INTVL_n Page 236 MAX DELAY n Page 236 MIN_DELAY n Page 236 NOM_DELAY n Page 237 RTP_PORT_MIN Page 237 RTP_PORT_MAX Page 237 RTP_PTIME Page 238 RTCP_ENABLE_n Page 238 RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n Page 239 RTE CLOSE ENABLE_n Page 239 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF_n Page 239 DTMF_ RELAY n Page 240 OUTBANDDTMF VOL Page 240 INBANDDTMF VOL Page 240 TELEVENT_PAYLOAD Page 240 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE_n Page 241 DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN Page 241 DTMF_INTDIGIT TIM Page 241 Administrator Guide 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface Document Version 2013 03 5 1 Configuration File Parameter List Line Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Call Control Settings DISPLAY NAME n Page 242 VM_NUMBER_n Page 242 DIAL PLAN n Page 242 DIAL PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE_n Page 243 SHARED CALL ENABLE n Page 243 FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n Page 244 RESOURCELIST URI_n Page 244 CW_ENABLE n Page 245 RETURN _VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE Page 245 FLASH RECALL TERMINATE Page 245 FLASHHOOK CONTENT TYPE Page 245
184. e 244 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Resource List URI Description Specifies the Uniform Resource Identifier string for the resource list which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip user example com For details refer to RFC 4662 Note e InaSIP URI the user part user in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters e When the BLF feature is assigned to a flexible button it may be necessary to specify this parameter depending on your phone system For details about flexible buttons see 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference RESOURCELIST_URI_n Page 244 4 6 2 2 Dial Plan Dial Plan max 1000 columns Description Specifies a dial format such as specific phone numbers that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call For details see 6 2 Dial Plan Value Range Max 1000 characters Note e Entering more than 1000 characters in this field causes an error and the previous value remains effective Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference
185. e Range 1 4094 Default Value Not applicable Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 83 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings IP Phone Priority Description Indicates the priority value of the phone using LLDP reference only Value Range 0 7 Default Value Not applicable PC VLAN ID KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Description Specifies the VLAN ID of the PC when the LLDP feature is enabled Value Range 0 4094 Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC Page 204 PC Priority KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Description Specifies the priority number of the PC when the LLDP feature is enabled Value Range 0 7 Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC Page 205 4 3 2 3 VLAN Settings Enable VLAN Description Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely Note e You should specify Yes for only one of LLDP VLAN or IEEE8021X e f Yes is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X gt VLAN gt LLDP Therefore if Yes is specified for both VLAN and LLDP the VLAN related settings are used Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference VLAN_ENABLE Page 196 84 Administrat
186. e configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up 40 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 2 4 Downloading Configuration Files Download Timing Explanation At regular intervals of time The configuration files are downloaded at specified intervals of time set in minutes In the example below the unit has been programmed to check for and download configuration files from the provisioning server every 3 days 4320 minutes CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL 4320 Provisioning SIP Phone Sarvar Check ee Download Check 3 days later A gt Download Check 6 days later zl lt gt Download The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following conditions e In the configuration file add the line CFG_CYCLIC Y Set an interval minutes by specifying CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL In the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select Yes for Cyclic Auto Resync Enter an interval minutes in Resync Interval Note The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer A maximum interval of 28 days 40320 minutes can be set on the unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 41 2 2 4 Downloading Configuration Files Download Timing Explanation At a specified time each day After the unit is powered on it will check for and download configuration files once p
187. e is a risk of echo occurring To assign a parameter to the unit 1 Press EB or Em 2 Press 2 7 6 3 Press A or Y to select the parameter 0 or 1 and then press ENTER Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 57 3 1 5 Sound Quality KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 only 58 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 4 Web User Interface Programming This section provides information about the settings available in the Web user interface Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 59 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and the access levels For details about each setting see the reference pages listed For details about setting up Web user interface programming see 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming Status Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Version Version Information Model v v Page 72 See Operating Bank v v Page 72 IPL Version v v Page 72 Firmware Version v v Page 72 Network Status Network Status MAC Address v v Page 73 Ethernet Link Status LAN v v Page 73 Port Ethernet Link Status PC v v Page 73 Port KX UT 123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Connection Mode y v Page 74 IP Address v v Page 74 Subnet Mask v v Page 74 Default Gateway v v Pa
188. e must be greater than or equal to Minimum Delay This value must be less than Maximum Delay Default Value 2 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference NOM_DELAY_n Page 237 4 5 4 4 DTMF DTMF Type Description Selects the method for transmitting DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones Value Range e Outband es Inband Note e Ifyou select Outband DTMF tones will be sent through SDP Session Description Protocol compliant with RFC 2833 If you select Inband DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream Default Value Outband Configuration File Reference OUTBANDDTMF_n Page 239 DTMF Relay Description Selects whether DTMF tones are sent in the SIP INFO message Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 119 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes DTMF tones will be sent in the SIP INFO message If you select No the method selected in DTMF Type will be used Default Value No Configuration File Reference DTMF_RELAY_n Page 240 4 5 4 5 Call Hold Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 Description Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the c 0 0 0 0 syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re INVITE message to hold the call If you select No t
189. e units try to access the same router simultaneously errors can occur Assigning a terminal number 1 to 9 to each of the units may prevent such errors To assign a terminal number to the unit 1 Press ES or Em 2 Press 7 3 1 3 Press A or Y to select the desired terminal number Auto Terminal 1 Terminal 9 and then press ENTER Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 3 1 5 Sound Quality KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 only 3 1 4 Reset Web ID Password Reset Web ID Password resets all the IDs and passwords required for users and administrators to access the Web user interface gt see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface to their factory defaults You can perform this operation from the unit To perform Reset Web ID Password 1 Press EB or EU 2 Press 7 3 9 3 Press A or Y to select Yes to reset the Web ID Password and then press ENTER All the IDs and passwords are reset and the unit will restart Notice e For security reasons it is recommended that the passwords are set again immediately gt see 4 4 2 Administrator Password or 4 4 3 Change User Password 3 1 5 Sound Quality KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 only You can select the parameter of the unit that you are using from 0 or 1 The default setting is 0 1 is a special technical parameter If you select 1 handset sound becomes more stable but ther
190. ed All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file You can ignore settings that already have the desired values Only change parameters as necessary For details about setting parameters and their descriptions see Section 5 Configuration File Programming Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 2 3 Configuration File Using 3 Types of Configuration Files The unit can download up to 3 configuration files One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the configuration files into the following 3 types Type Usage Master configuration file Configure settings that are common to all units such as the SIP server address and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP Network Time Protocol servers managed by your phone system dealer This configuration file is used by all the units Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg Product configuration file Configure settings that are required for a particular model such as the default setting of the privacy mode This configuration file is used by all the units that have the same model name The same number of configuration files as models being used on the network are stored on the provisioning server and units with the same model name download the corresponding configuration file Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic Config MODEL cfg Note s When
191. eecceeeneneneeeeeeees 93 INGA SIMO De sre ccs 2c 2 tees ecaccectt odie ada bicctot cevtt scat etet dance Zedsaiwesestescetdacetidadeudieatutses weacee 93 4 3 6 3 External RIP coc 6 EE 93 Channel T 25 EEN 93 4 3 7 Application Settings nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 94 4 3 7 1 Application Settings nenn nnnnnennnnnan 94 Application Ee EE 94 Enable Application cccccccccscccsscccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesaeesaaaeaaaa 94 4 3 7 2 Application Authentication cccccccccccccccaeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaaaaaaeaeeteneees 94 Authentication ID 94 Authentication Password cccccccecccceccceeceeuceueuceuuuceuuceueacauuuceeeueueaesuaueueueeueaeeuaneeeaes 95 4 4 VS COIN E 95 4 4 1 WA EAT e 95 4 4 1 1 Web AS s sariei an tan ienaa BEPTERFULDRDELDEFILRERARETEIELEREHEDEBEBEDELEHEERITDEETEENENGERER 95 let UE 95 4 4 2 Administrator Password uuunuuensneennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 96 4 4 2 1 Change Administrator Password see 96 Current Password cc ccceccceeccceeeseeceseeeeeeeeeueuseueeeeeeeeeuueesaueeeuuuesaueeeauueueueaueueaeeeeasenees 96 New Password 2 2 u2 0 000 ehe ees 96 Confirm New Password cccccccccecceecceeceeeeeeueeeuuseeeueeuuueeeuueeaueeaueeeeueeeaueeeeueeaneeaneees 97 4 4 3 Change SSE aS san ee een ie 97 4 4 3 1 Change User en E 97 Current Passwo
192. eel age CR RE 210 TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT_HANDSET 22 2 0 210 TONE LEN DISCONNECT MANDSEREE ses 210 BET PAD TONE euren endeten ee ee ea ee een 210 AHOLD AND CALL ENABLE ee een 211 MOLD TRANSFER OPERATION 2 2 22 eegene et ege tee 211 5 5 2 Tone Sellings E 211 DIAL TONET FRO EN 211 DIAL ve TEE 211 DIAL TONET SRP WE 212 DIAL TONEL TIMING rn 212 DIAL TONE2 FRQ anne nenne ee 212 DIAL TONE2 GAIN en ee 212 DIAL TONE2 WE 213 DIAL te ER E EE 213 DIAL TONE4 EE 213 DIAL TONE4A EE 213 DIAL ONES WE 214 DIAL TONE4 TIMING ee 214 BUSY TONE FRO E 214 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 Table of Contents BUSY TONE GAIN WE 215 BUSY TONES RPT E 215 BUSY_TONE_TIMING EE 215 REORDER TONE EE 215 REORDER_TONE_GAIN E 216 REORDER TONE RE 216 REORDER teen UE 216 RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ ee ne ee 216 RINGBACK TONE GAIN 22 iearanedeennandeeneie 217 RINGBACK TONE RPT EE 217 RINGBACK TOME TIMING EE 217 HOLD ALARM FRO Seen ee 217 HOLD ALARM GAIN 2222 ee ei een EAEE AA AARE gehende 218 AHOLD E E EE 218 HOLD ALAR WMS E 218 CW TONET FRO ttm nr eke ee er rr ener Dene nero ry re ae 218 CW AIOE ASIN WEE 218 EEN Kal RE WE 219 Ee tel RRE 219 AHOLD TONER EE 219 AHOLD TONE GAIN EE 219 AHOLD TONE E WE 220 ASIEN Ke ET C 220 BELL CORE PATE CCRN 220 BELL CORE PAT TERING TIMING 2 seien anne 220 BELL CORE PATTERN3 TIMINS ae 22 ee 221 BELL CORE _PATTERN4 TIMING un ee 221 BELL CORE PAT RI
193. efer to RFC 3261 Value Range e 250 500 e 1000 e 2000 e 4000 Default Value 500 Web User Interface Reference T1 Timer Page 111 SIP_TIMER_T2_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER T2_1 SIP_TIMER_T2_2 SIP_TIMER_T2_6 Value Format Integer Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 253 5 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range e 2 e 4 e 8 e 16 32 Default Value 4 Web User Interface Reference T2 Timer Page 111 SIP_TIMER_T4_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER T4_1 SIP_TIMER T4 2 SIP_TIMER_T4 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum period in seconds that a message can remain on the network Value Range e 0 e 4 e 2 3 e 4 e 5 Default Value 0 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n 254 Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to perform the fail over process when the unit detects that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message Value Range e Y Enable fail over N Disable fail over Note e If set to Y the unit will try to use the other SIP servers via the DNS SRV and A records e If set to N the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers
194. en allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC For details see 6 1 1 Import Export Operation Note When you begin transferring the phonebook data the Now Processing File Data screen is displayed and the screen is periodically reloaded Click the text HERE in the message to display the Export Phonebook screen again If you do not the Now Processing File Data screen remains displayed even if the export is complete Depending on your Web browser the screen might not reload automatically and you will need to click the text HERE before the timer expires in order for the export operation to function properly Depending on the security settings of your Web browser pop up menus might be blocked at the time of export The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop up Blocker 142 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 8 Application Settings settings are set to enable and the file may not be exported successfully In this case try the export operation again or disable the Pop up Blocker feature of your Web browser Panasonic KX UT136 Web Port Close Telephone I Export Phonebook Application Settings Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Export Phonebook Export Phonebook Click Export button to export the phonebook from this unit 4 6 8 Application Settings This screen allows you to configure the various URLs
195. er F Description Specifies the value of SIP timer F non INVITE transaction timeout timer in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_F_n Page 266 Timer H Description Specifies the value of SIP timer H wait time for ACK reception in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 250 64000 Default Value 32000 112 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_H_n Page 266 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x Timer J Description Specifies the value of SIP timer J wait time for non INVITE request resending in milliseconds For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range 0 250 64000 Default Value 5000 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_J_n Page 266 4 5 2 10 Quality of Service QoS SIP Packet QoS DSCP Description Selects the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point level of DiffServ applied to SIP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference DSCP_SIP_n Page 252 4 5 2 11 SIP extensions Supports 100rel RFC 3262 Description Selects whether to add the option tag 100rel to the Supported header of the INVITE message For details refer to RFC 3262 Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes
196. er day at the specified time CFG _RESYNC_TIME 02 00 Provisioning SIP Phone Sawer Power On M at 12 00 lt Download Check lt 7 2 00 A Check rer lt 7 2 0 El The configuration files are downloaded at a set time each day e Seta time by specifying CFG_RESYNC_TIME Note e If the value for CFG _RESYNC_TIME is any valid value other than an empty string the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed time and the settings specified in CFG CYCLIC CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL and CFG_RTRY_INTVL are disabled The time is specified using a 24 hour clock 00 00 to 23 59 When directed When a setting needs to be changed immediately units can be directed to download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message that includes a special event from the SIP server e In the configuration file Specify the special event text in CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP s In the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then enter the special event text in Header Value for Resync Event Generally check sync or resync is set as the special event text 42 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 2 5 Provisioning Server Setting Example Download Timing Explanation None prohibited If you want to prohibit units from changing their settings by downloading configuration files you can ena
197. ersion 2013 03 Notes Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 311 Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2011 PNQX3582UA DD0611MK5033
198. erver address E ce the DHCP server using DHCP server option SIP Phone EE DHCP Server Option 66 Step 2 The unit downloads the configuration file for pre provisioning from the TFTP server tftp 192 168 0 130 KX UT248 cfg tftp 192 168 0 130 KX UT248 cfg Note TFTP Server The file name may be different depending on the phone being used For example the file name for KX UT113 users will be tftp 192 168 0 130 KX UT113 cfg Step 3 The URL of the server where the configuration file for provisioning is stored provisioning server is set http provisioning example com to the unit Lo Panasonic Config0080F0123456 cfg http provisioning example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg KX UT248 cfg Step 4 The unit will display a message indicating pre provisioning is complete Complete Pre Provisioning Step 5 When the message is displayed turn off the unit s power then turn it back on The unit may restart automatically depending on the http provisioning example com Panasonic Config0080F0123456 cfg configuration file programming gt see Config0080F0123456 cfg OPTION66_REBOOT in 5 3 5 Provisioning SIP Phone Provisioning Settings Server When the unit is distributed to end users and started up in real circumstances provisioning will be performed correctly Note This example describes the case when only one unit is connected However multiple units can be configured throug
199. escription Selects whether to enable the XML application feature Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_ENABLE Page 228 4 3 7 2 Application Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML application server Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_USERID Page 228 94 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 4 1 Web Language Authentication Password Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML application server Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_USERPASS Page 229 4 4 System This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the System tab 4 4 1 Web Language This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface The language setting is only applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User Note e If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User account the language will be changed after the message Complete is displayed If you are logged in with the Administrator account t
200. escription Specifies the percentage of the expires value after which to refresh subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same dialog Value Range 1 100 Default Value 90 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_6 Value Format String 262 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Address Page 108 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Port Page 108 SIP_TRANSPORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 SIP_TRANSPORT 2 SIP_TRANSPORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets Value Range es 0 UDP e 1 TCP Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Tra
201. essctesseteaseceseccesecceeceeseccesecensiverses 87 Authentication ID 87 Authentication Password ccccccceccsceccceeceeucesuucecuuceuuceueaceueueeeueeueacuuuueueaeeueaeauageeeaes 87 4 3 4 ATIP Tue EE 88 4 3 4 1 el RI Client Settings ms ea 88 HTTP Version EE 88 APIR USer Agent nee au 88 4 3 4 2 HTTP Authentication ccccccccccccccesceccseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeueaueeeceueeueeeaueeeueueeeeeaeeueaeseaeeeeaes 89 Authentication ID EE 89 Authentication Password ccccccceccccececeeceeecesuuceuuuceuuceueaceuaueeuecsueueeuaeueaeaueneuuaneauees 89 4 3 4 3 PFOXY Server Settings seiere oiia aa A EAE EE AEE EREE REEE 89 ee EE 89 Proxy Server Address 2a a set 90 Proxy Server POr SREUERAIEBAIELEBELLEBBERBEPISERPE T EIPELEHERELEREERTPTENEHRIELPENELVEETRERLIUEELTSERPALLEORIIERERR 90 4 3 5 Global Address Detection uunuuuuannennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn 90 4 3 5 1 Global Address Detection cccccccccccceccceeeccueeceueeseueseueeseueeseueeseueeseueeesuuaeeuaaeeuueeeunasss 90 Detection Method EEN 90 Detection Internal 91 4 3 5 2 STUN SERVER us see a ee EE 91 STUN Server Address ccccccecccceccceecsueeeeeeeeueeeeeueeueuseuuueeeuueueeeaueeseueaeueeeeeeeaneeaneeens 91 STUN Server e EE 91 4 3 6 Static NAP Wu e CT 91 4 3 6 1 Global IP Address ee EE ee Pe eee 92 Global IP Address AANEREN 92 4 3 6 2 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line 2 cc cecseeeeeeeeeceeeese
202. ets Value Range 5 65535 Default Value 5 Configuration File Reference RTCP_INTVL_n Page 236 4 5 4 3 Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay Description Specifies the maximum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 3 50 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than Initial Delay This value must be greater than Minimum Delay Initial Delay must be greater than or equal to Minimum Delay Default Value 20 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference MAX_DELAY_n Page 236 Minimum Delay Description Specifies the minimum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer 118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x Value Range 1 or 2 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be less than or equal to Initial Delay This value must be less than Maximum Delay Maximum Delay must be greater than Initial Delay Default Value 2 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference MIN_DELAY_n Page 236 Initial Delay Description Specifies the initial delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 7 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This valu
203. f the table value format description permitted value range default value of each parameter phone user interface reference and Web user interface reference Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 167 5 2 2 Characters Available for String Values Parameter Name This is the system predefined parameter name and cannot be changed Note e Certain parameter names end with _n This signifies that these settings can be made to each line individually The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 KX UT248 1 6 Value Format Each parameter value is categorized into Integer Boolean or String Some parameters require a composite form such as Comma separated Integer or Comma separated String e Integer a numerical value described as a sequence of numerical characters optionally preceded by a minus An empty string is not allowed e Boolean Y or N String sequence of alphanumerical characters For details about available characters see 5 2 2 Characters Available for String Values Comma separated Integer a list of integers separated by commas No space characters are allowed Comma separated String a list of strings separated by commas No space characters are allowed Description Describes the details of the parameter Value Range Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter Default Value
204. formed again Note that the settings configured by pre provisioning cannot be restored once it has been performed If you want to restore them consult your phone system dealer Although pre provisioning is often used to specify the location of the configuration files for provisioning you can configure any of the settings through pre provisioning The unit can be made fully operational by configuring settings through pre provisioning Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 1 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example 2 1 2 Pre provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses To perform pre provisioning the unit needs to acquire the TFTP server address from option 66 on a DHCP server Therefore pre provisioning cannot be performed if you use static IP addressing on your network If you use static IP addressing and want to perform pre provisioning construct a small separate network and connect a DHCP and TFTP server to that network In addition if option 66 of the DHCP server cannot be set or if you are unauthorized to change this setting perform pre provisioning on the separate network and then connect the unit to the actual network 2 1 3 Server for Pre provisioning The DHCP server and TFTP server play important roles in performing pre provisioning This section explains their purposes uses and brief descriptions Server Purpose Description DHCP server Used to provide the address In option 66 of the DHCP server spec
205. g Tabs Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings When you click a tab the corresponding menu items and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear There are 6 tabs for the Administrator account and 4 tabs for the User account For details about the account types see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in this section Menu The menu displays the sub categories of the selected tab Configuration Screen Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen which contains the actual settings grouped into sections For details see 4 2 Status to 4 7 6 Restart Buttons The following standard buttons are displayed in the Web user interface Button Function Web Port Close Closes the Web port of the unit and logs you out of the Web user interface after a confirmation message is displayed Save Applies changes and displays a result message gt see Result Messages in this section Cancel Discards changes The settings on the current screen will return to the values they had before being changed Refresh Updates the status information displayed on the screen This button is displayed in the upper right area of the Network Status and VoIP Status screens Entering Characters In the Web user interface when specifying a name message password or other text item you can enter any of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background
206. g Lower Digit 141 Number Matching Upper Digit 141 NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT 222 NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT 222 NW_SETTING_ ENABLE 203 O ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE 210 Open Source Software Notice 2 Opening Closing the Web Port 22 Operating Bank 72 OPTION66_ENABLE 179 OPTION66_REBOOT 179 Other Network Settings 27 OUTBANDDTMF_n 239 OUTBANDDTMF_VOL 240 Outbound Proxy Server 108 Outbound Proxy Server Address 108 Outbound Proxy Server Port 108 Outline 2 Overview of Programming 20 Document Version 2013 03 P Parameter No 1 24 135 PC Priority 84 85 PC VLAN ID 84 85 PC Port 82 PCMA Enable 121 PCMA Priority 121 PCMU Enable 122 PCMU Priority 122 PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE 187 PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL 188 PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME 188 Phone Number 76 106 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands 56 Phone User Interface Programming 20 56 PHONE_NUMBER_n 247 Phonebook Data in Text Format 274 Phonebook deletion 56 Phonebook Import and Export 272 Port Close Timer 99 Port Forwarding 28 PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_n 259 POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE 224 Pre provisioning 34 Presence Server Address 108 Presence Server Port 108 Primary DNS Server 19 75 79 80 194 195 Priority of Setting Methods 45 Product Configuration File 39 150 181 Product File URL 150 PROFILE_ENABLEn 248 PROVISION_ENABLE 180 Provisioning 38 Provisioning Maintenance 40 148 149 Provisioning Server 37 43 Provisioning Settings 40
207. ge 193 DNS1 80 Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings Phone User Interface Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Reference Configuration File Reference USER_DNS1_ADDR Page 194 DNS2 Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Reference Configuration File Reference USER_DNS2_ADDR Page 194 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports and the VLAN settings Note e When you change the settings on this screen and click Save after the message Complete has been displayed the unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied If a unit is on a call when Complete has been displayed the unit will restart after
208. ge 74 DNS1 v v Page 75 DNS2 v v Page 75 IEEE802 1X Status v v Page 75 KX UT248 only VoIP Status VoIP Status Line No v v Page 76 Phone Number v v Page 76 VoIP Status v v Page 76 1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 60 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Network Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Leve Ref U A Basic Network Connection Mode Connection Mode s Page 78 SST DHCP Settings Host Name v Page 78 Domain Name Server vo vw Page 79 Static Settings Static IP Address ve vw Page 79 Subnet Mask ve vw Page 80 Default Gateway vos vi Page 80 DNS17 vil vw Page 80 DNS2 v3 v Page 81 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 61 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List 62 Access ha Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Ethernet Port Link Speed Duplex LAN Port v Page 82 tti M Bande ete PC Port KX UT123 v Page 82 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only LLDP Settings Enable LLDP Page 83 LLDP MED Interval timer Page 83 IP Phone VLAN ID Page 83 Priority Page 84 PC u VLAN ID KX UT123 v Page 84 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Priority KX UT123 v P
209. gs VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the priority number for the unit Note e This setting is available only when both NW_SETTING ENABLE and IEEE802 1X_ENABLE KX UT248 only are set to N Value Range 0 7 Default Value 7 Web User Interface Reference IP Phone Priority Page 85 VLAN_ID_PC Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC Note e This setting is available only when both NW_SETTING ENABLE and IEEE802 1X_ENABLE KX UT248 only are set to N Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 1 Web User Interface Reference PC VLAN ID KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Page 85 VLAN_PRI_PC Value Format Integer Description Specifies the priority number for the PC Note e This setting is available only when both NW_SETTING ENABLE and IEEE802 1X_ENABLE KX UT248 only are set to N Value Range 0 7 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference PC Priority KX UT123 KX UT 133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Page 85 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 197 5 4 4 IEEE 802 1X Settings KX UT248 only 5 4 4 IEEE 802 1X Settings KX UT248 only IEEE8021X_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether to use the IEEE 802 1X protocol Note e This setting is availa
210. guration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC Page 184 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 7 4 Management Server Resync Interval Description Specifies the interval in minutes between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files Value Range 1 40320 Default Value 10080 Configuration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL Page 185 Header Value for Resync Event Description Specifies the value of the Event header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server Value Range Max 15 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty Default Value check sync Configuration File Reference CFG_RESYNC_FROM SIP Page 186 4 7 4 Management Server This screen allows you to configure the management server Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System f VoIP Telephone Maintenance Management Server Management Server URL Local Firmware Update a Management Server Authentication Provisioning iz Authentication ID Management Server Reset to Defaults Authentication Password Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 151 4 7 5 Reset to Defaults 4 7 4 1 Management Server Management Server URL Description Specifies the URL of the Auto Configuration Server for using TR 069 Note This parameter must be in
211. guration Server for using TR 069 Value Range Max 255 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 152 ACS_PASS Value Format String Description Specifies the user password for the Auto Configuration Server for using TR 069 Value Range Max 255 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 152 PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether or not the CPE Customer Premises Equipment must periodically send CPE information to the ACS Auto Configuration Server using the Inform method call Value Range Y Enable e N Disable Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 187 5 3 6 Management Server Settings Default Value PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval length in seconds when the CPE must attempt to connect with the ACS and call the Inform method Note e This setting is available only when PERIODIC _INFORM_ ENABLE is set to Y Value Range 30 2419200 Default Value 86400 PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME Value Format String Description Specifies the time UTC to determine when the CPE wil
212. h the same procedure without changing any settings because the MAC address is specified by the MAC macro Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 37 2 2 3 Configuration File 2 2 Provisioning 2 2 1 What is Provisioning After pre provisioning has been performed gt see 2 1 Pre provisioning you can set up the unit automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit This is called provisioning Phone system dealer End user configuration Provisioning Pre provisioning data 2 2 2 Protocols for Provisioning Provisioning can be performed over HTTP HTTPS FTP and TFTP The protocol you should use differs depending on how you will perform provisioning Normally HTTP HTTPS or FTP is used for provisioning If you are transmitting encrypted configuration files it is recommended that you use HTTP If you are transmitting unencrypted configuration files it is recommended that you use HTTPS You may not be able to use FTP depending on the conditions of the network router or the network to be used 2 2 3 Configuration File 38 This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer and will be downloaded to the units as requir
213. he c x x x x syntax will be set in SDP Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n Page 241 4 5 4 6 CODEC Preferences G722 Enable Description Selects whether to enable the G 722 codec for voice data transmission Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 G722 Priority Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G 722 codec Value Range 1 255 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 120 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x PCMA Enable Description Selects whether to enable the PCMA codec for voice data transmission Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 PCMA Priority Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMA codec Value Range 1 255 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 G726 32 Enable Description Selects whether to enable the G 726 32 codec for voice data transmission Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 G726 32 Priority Descri
214. he Status of the Unit 294 CODEC Preferences 120 Codec Settings 163 233 Codec Settings Examples 48 CODEC_ENABLEx_n 234 CODEC_G711_REQ 233 CODEC _G729_ PARAM 234 CODEC_PRIORITYx_n 234 CON_REQ_PASS 189 CON_REQ_USER_ID 188 Conference Server URI 124 CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI 205 Configuration File 38 167 Configuration File Examples 47 Configuration File Parameter List 156 Configuration File Parameters 167 Configuration File Programming 155 Configuration File Specifications 46 Configuration Parameter Example 288 Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit 19 Confirm New Password 97 98 Connection Mode 74 78 CONNECTION_TYPE 191 Controls on the Window 24 Country Calling Code 125 COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE 207 Current Password 96 97 CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE 203 CW_ENABLE_n 245 CW_TONE1_FRQ 218 CW_TONE1_GAIN 218 CW_TONE1_RPT 219 CW_TONE1_TIMING 219 Cyclic Auto Resync 150 Document Version 2013 03 Index D DATA UNE MODE 207 Day of Week 102 103 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time 101 Default Gateway 74 80 Default Line for Outgoing 125 DEFAULT_LANGUAGE 223 DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT 207 Detection Interval 91 Detection Method 90 DHCP Server 18 35 179 DHCP Settings 78 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE 192 Dial Plan 129 278 279 Dial Plan max 1000 columns 129 Dial Plan Example 281 Dial Plan Settings 279 Dial Tone 136 DIAL_PLAN_n 242 DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n 243 DIAL_TONE1_FRQ 211 DIAL_TONE1_GAIN 211 DIAL_TONE1_RPT 212 DIAL_TONE1_TIMING 21
215. he current network information of the unit such as the MAC address IP address Ethernet port status etc Clicking Refresh updates the information displayed on the screen Panasonic KX UT248 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Network Status eres Status MAC Address a Ethernet Link Status LAN Port Connected Ethernet Link Status PC Port Connected Connection Mode DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 111 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 DNS1 192 168 0 254 DNS2 IEEE802 1X Status Disabled 4 2 2 1 Network Status MAC Address Description Indicates the MAC address of the unit reference only Value Range Not applicable Default Value Default MAC address example OO80FOABCDEF Ethernet Link Status LAN Port Description Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet LAN port reference only Value Range e Connected e Not connected Default Value Not applicable Ethernet Link Status PC Port KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Description Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet PC port reference only Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 73 4 2 2 Network Status Value Range e Connected e Not connected Default Value Not applicable Connection Mode Description Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically DHCP or manually
216. he language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as User The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English e The language used for the unit remains unchanged even if the language for the Web user interface is changed Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Web Language System Web Language EE I Language English US v Administrator Password ch User P d ange User Passwort See Cancer Time Adjust Settings 4 4 1 1 Web Language Language Description Selects the language used for the Web user interface Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 95 4 4 2 Administrator Password Value Range English US e English UK e Deutsch e Francais e Espanol e Italiano e Portugu s e Pycckun Default Value English US 4 4 2 Administrator Password This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Note e Forsecurity reasons the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters which differ depending on the Web browser e After you change the administrator password the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears Two consecutive login failures will result in an error 401 Unauthorized This restriction only applies the first time you atte
217. ified in Channel 1 25 in 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Range 1424 49150 even number only Note The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to RTP_PORT_MIN 400 Changing this setting may affect the number of simultaneous calls that can be made Therefore when setting this parameter be aware that the maximum number of necessary ports can be calculated as shown below No of lines x No of channels x 2 x 10 No of terminals Default Value 20000 Web User Interface Reference Maximum RTP Port Number Page 116 RTP_PTIME Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in milliseconds between transmissions of RTP packets Value Range e 20 e 30 e 40 Default Value 20 Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet Time Page 115 RTCP_ENABLE_n 238 Parameter Name Example RTCP_ENABLE_1 RTCP_ENABLE 2 RTCP_ENABLE_6 Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP Real Time Transport Control Protocol For details refer to RFC 3550 Value Range Y Enable RTCP N Disable RTCP Default Value N Web User Interface Reference RTCP Enable Page 118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings RTCP_S
218. ify the IP ofa TFTP server setin option address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of 66 of the DHCP server to the TFTP server units that have not been For details refer to the documentation for your configured yet DHCP server Note The maximum length of FQDN text is 255 bytes TFTP server Used to store configuration The unit will download the configuration file model files and is set as the access name cfg stored in the root directory of the TFTP point for downloading them server automatically For example if the model name is KX UTxxx the unit will download the configuration file KX UTxxx cfg DHCP and TFTP servers may be supplied with your operating system provided through commercial services and are also distributed freely on the Internet Use a server setup that best matches your environment When installing and setting up the DHCP server and TFTP server refer to the documentation supplied with the product For details about connecting servers to the network and managing them consult your network administrator 2 1 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example This section gives an example of how to perform pre provisioning Assumptions Item Description Setting TFTP server address 192 168 0 130 Distribution directory of TFTP server tftproot Model name of the unit KX UTxxx MAC address of the unit 0080F0123456 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 35 2 1 4 P
219. ilable only when SIP_TRANSPORT_n is set to 0 for UDP Value Range 0 10 300 0 Disable Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Keep Alive Interval Page 114 SIP_ADD_RPORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_ADD_RPORT_1 SIP_ADD RPORT_2 SIP_ADD_RPORT Value Format Boolean Description Selects whether to add the rport parameter to the top Via header field value of requests generated For details refer to RFC 3581 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 259 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e Y Add Rport RFC 3581 es N Do not add Rport RFC 3581 Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Supports Rport RFC 3581 Page 114 SIP_REQURI_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_REQURI_PORT_1 SIP_REQURI_PORT_2 SIP_REQURI_PORT 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the port parameter to the Request Line in the initial SIP request Value Range e y Add the port parameter es N Do not add the port parameter Note e Request URI in REGISTER example If setto Y the port parameter is added to the Request Line as follows Request Line REGISTER sip 192 168 0 10 5060 SIP 2 0 If setto N the port parameter is not added to the Request Line as follows Request Line REGISTER sip 192 168 0 10 SIP 2 0 Default Value SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n Parameter N
220. ile with the fields separated by tabs Note e The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel Therefore files exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each other 6 1 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook and then edit the exported data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data In Microsoft Outlook click File and then click Import and Export Select Export to a file and click Next Select Tab Separated Values Windows and click Next Select Contacts and click Next Click Browse select a folder and then enter the file name to export the data to Click OK On the Export to a File window click Next Click Map Custom Fields Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map Then drag only Last Name and Business Phone from the From list to the To list and click OK Lef Se oe mg Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 277 6 2 Dial Plan 10 On the Export to a File window click Finish The data will be exported Note e You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure It is also possible to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel e You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel and then impo
221. ile Reference NTP_ADDR Page 201 4 4 5 3 Time Zone Time Zone Description Selects your time zone Value Range GMT 12 00 GMT 13 00 Default Value GMT Configuration File Reference TIME_ZONE Page 170 4 4 5 4 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time Enable DST Enable Summer Time Description Selects whether to enable DST Summer Time Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Configuration File Reference DST_ENABLE Page 171 DST Offset Summer Time Offset Description Specifies the amount of time in minutes to change the time when Enable DST Enable Summer Time is set to Yes Value Range 0 720 Default Value 60 Configuration File Reference DST_OFFSET Page 171 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 101 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings 4 4 5 5 Start Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time Month Description Selects the month in which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e January e February e March e April e May e June e July e August e September October November e December Default Value March Configuration File Reference DST_START_MONTH Page 172 Day of Week Using the 2 following settings specify on which day of the selected month DST Summer Time starts For example to specify the second Sunday select Second and Sunday Descri
222. iles Department Name URL of Product Configuration File Sales http prov example com Panasonic ConfigSales cfg Planning http prov example com Panasonic ConfigPlanning cfg 2 2 A Downloading Configuration Files Downloading a Configuration File via the Web User Interface The following procedure describes how to enable downloading a configuration file via the Web User Interface to be used for programming the unit 1 2 3 Confirm that the provisioning server s IP address FQDN and directory are correct and store the configuration files in the directory e g http provisioning example com Panasonic Config_Sample cfg Enter the IP address of the unit into the PC s Web browser gt see 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Log in as the administrator gt see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in 1 1 6 3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select Yes for Enable Provisioning Enter the URL set up in Step 1 in Standard File URL Click Save Timing of Downloading A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up at regular intervals and when directed to do so by the server In addition you can prohibit units from downloading the configuration files For details about the settings see 4 7 3 Provisioning Maintenance and 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Download Timing Explanation Startup Th
223. ine 1 DirectoryNumber TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile DISPLAY NAME n Page 242 n Line 1 CallingFeatures CallerIDName TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile CW_ENABLE n Page 245 n Line 1 CallingFeatures CallWaitingEnable TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile LINE_ENABLE o Page 248 n Line 1 Enable TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT Page 227 1 ButtonMap Button x FacilityAction x TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile FLEX BUTTON FACILITY ARG Page 227 1 ButtonMap Button x x FacilityActionArgument TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK DIALx Page 227 1 ButtonMap Button x QuickDialNumber Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 53 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 Parameter Name Requirement Ref TR 069 Parameter Configuration File Parameter TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile FLEX BUTTON LABEL Page 228 1 ButtonMap Button x ButtonMessage 54 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 3 Phone User Interface Programming This section explains how to configure the unit by entering direct commands through the phone user interface Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 55 3 1 3 Terminal Number Settings 3 1 Phone User Interface Programming This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from
224. inite time Note e Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING Value Format Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 5 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using up to 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 221 5 5 3 Telephone Settings Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 500 5 5 3 Telephone Settings DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the name saved in the phonebook is used in place of the name display if a matching entry is found Value Range e y Enable Display Name Replace e N Disable Display Name Replace Default Value Y NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the minimum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call s caller ID To specify exact matching of entire numbers only specify 0 Value Range 0 15 Default Value 7 Web User Interface Reference Number Matching Lower Digit Page 141 NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the
225. ion Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Voice Mail Access Number Page 127 DIAL_PLAN_n 242 Parameter Name Example DIAL PLAN 1 DIAL PLAN 2 DIAL PLAN 6 Value Format String Description Specifies a dial format such as specific phone numbers that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call For details see 6 2 Dial Plan Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Dial Plan max 1000 columns Page 129 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 1 Call Control Settings DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n Parameter Name Example DIAL_PLAN_NOT MATCH ENABLE 1 DIAL PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 2 DIAL PLAN MOT MATCH ENABLE 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not made when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in DIAL PLAN o Value Range e Y Enable dial plan filtering N Disable dial plan filtering Note e If setto Y the dialed number will not be sent to the line when the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the
226. ion set on the server e If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting e You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 4 6 2 1 Call Control or through configuration file programming gt see FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n in 5 7 1 Call Control Settings e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No 132 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Busy Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when the line is in use Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 32 characters Note e You cannot leave this field empty if Busy Enable Call Forward is set to Yes Default Value Not stored No Answer Enable Call Forward
227. is available for that access level This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 2 Status Maintenance Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Evel Ref U A Firmware Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update v Page 146 mamenanre Update Type v Page 147 Firmware File URL v Page 147 Local Firmware Local Firmware Update Encryption v Page 148 SE File Name v Page 148 Provisioning Provisioning Enable Provisioning v Page 149 Maintenance Maintenance Standard File URL p Page 149 Product File URL v Page 150 Master File URL v Page 150 Cyclic Auto Resync v Page 150 Resync Interval v Page 151 Header Value for Resync v Page 151 Event Management Management Server Management Server URL v Page 152 SES Management Server Authentication ID v Page 152 En Authentication Password v Page 152 Reset to Defaults Reset Web Data v Page 152 Restart Restart v Page 153 TI The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming 4 2 Status This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Status tab Document Version 2013 03 Administrator G
228. istrator Guide 19 1 1 5 Phone User Interface Programming If you select DHCP for the connection mode all the settings concerning static connection will be ignored even if they have been specified e If you select DHCP for the connection mode and Automatic for DNS the DNS server settings DNS1 and DNS2 will be ignored even if they have been specified 1 1 4 Overview of Programming There are 3 types of programming as shown in the table below Programming programming T Description References ype Phone user Configuring the unit s settings directly from the unit 1 1 5 Phone User Interface interface Programming Section 3 Phone User Interface Programming Web user interface programming Configuring the unit s settings by accessing the Web user interface from a PC connected to the same network 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming Section 4 Web User Interface Programming Configuration file programming Configuring the unit s settings beforehand by creating configuration files pre provisioning and having the unit download the files from a server on the Internet and configure its own settings provisioning Section 2 General Information on Provisioning Section 5 Configuration File Programming 1 1 5 Phone User Interface Programming You can change the settings directly from the unit For details about the operations refer to the Operating
229. itsrttsretsrrerrresnreen 189 ANNEX_G_ STUN SERV PORT 190 ANNEX G STUN USER AD aussen Eege 190 ANNEX G STUN PASS irca ii aiaiai aai EE aiiai 190 ANNEX G STUN MAX KEEP ALIVE nase 190 ANNEX_G_ STUN MIN_KEEP_ALIVE o0 c ccccccccccsescscsseseesssssesesesesesesesesesetstsesentees 191 UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT unensenenenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnennn 191 Network Settings sind vaca eududenda adaaduedaaTecuvdedivendvaltfaveddervadstesstaeduuentidaluawedaawaesiucangsoaueualeuiie 191 IPSENINgS 2 wesen 191 CONNECTION TYPE EN 191 HOSTNAME EE 192 DMO LE EE 192 SIATIC EE 193 E TN SINE eseu gege 193 UP NC GATEWAY EE 193 USER DNS ADDR sseisssissiissieesiesstiessiestiestitsttt titka kts 1t artta tket rtan rassi nas rerne ree errare ean 194 SER DNS2 ORR EE 194 IER 195 Mute PREL EE 195 BIN Sl e Uk 5 GRRBEDEREENAENEERAERPERDEDENN e Pir rrPenrrr a rere er rrr E ere rere ry 195 EE ee 195 OS ey eee eee err er ere er er ney wy ery er preter EE 196 Ethernet Port Settings nee ae ee 196 VAN SNE eeneg 196 VIR VI PN EE 196 EEN Te IP PO eege EE 197 VEAN TI Oe ne eee een emer me ce er emailen rain 197 VIE WE NEE 197 IEEE 802 1X Settings KA UT 248 only anne nn 198 IEEE8021X ENABLE EE 198 IEEE8021X AU THJPR te E 198 IEEEBOZIX USER ID csccecessiccsicosthcouidsssicsusassestcsanesevessusdarstseltect casssensvsddubedannd atdastans 198 TERE O02 IEUSER PASS see nee 199 a RU See E 199 FTTPDLPORTOPENEAU TO ae ae 199 ATIR VER EE 200 A
230. l initiate the periodic Inform method calls Note e Each Inform call must occur at this reference time plus or minus an integer multiple of the PERIODIC_INFORM INTERVAL This PERIODIC_INFORM TIME parameter is used only to set the phase of the periodic Informs The actual value can be arbitrarily set far into the past or future For example if PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL is set to 86400 one day and if PERIODIC_INFORM TIME is set to midnight on a certain day then periodic Informs will occur every day at midnight starting from the set date e If the time is set to unknown time the start time depends on the CPE s settings However the PERIODIC _INFORM_INTERVAL must still be adhered to If absolute time is not available to the CPE its periodic Inform behavior must be the same as if the PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME parameter was set to the unknown time e Time zones other than UTC are not supported Value Range 4 32 characters Default Value 0001 01 01T00 00 00Z unknown time CON_REQ_USER_ID Value Format String 188 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 6 Management Server Settings Description Specifies the username used to authenticate an ACS making a Connection Request to the CPE Value Range Max 63 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string CON_REQ_PASS Value Format String
231. l to the Supported header of the INVITE message For details refer to RFC 3262 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e Y Enable 100rel function e N Disable 100rel function Note e If setto Y the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled The option tag 100rel will be added to the Supported header of the INVITE message and to the Require header of the 1xx provisional message If setto N the option tag 100rel will not be used Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Supports 100rel RFC 3262 Page 113 SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n Parameter Name Example SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_1 SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_2 SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the period in seconds in which the INVITE message will expire Value Range 0 60 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the retransmission interval in seconds for 18x responses Value Range 0 1 600 0 Disable Default Value 0 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP
232. lable only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 79 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Configuration File Reference STATIC_IP_ADDRESS Page 193 Subnet Mask Description Specifies the subnet mask for the unit Note This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Configuration File Reference STATIC_SUBNET Page 193 Default Gateway Description Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where the unit is connected Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Configuration File Reference STATIC_GATEWAY Pa
233. lds to 0 disable 4 3 6 1 Global IP Address Global IP Address 92 Description Specifies the global IP address of your network Note You must enter a value in this field if at least 1 of Line 1 Line x is set to Yes or when port numbers are specified in Channel 1 25 The available line number and the channel number vary depending on the type of the unit being used The global IP address will reflect SIP messages and RTP packets Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation n n n n n 0 255 Max 15 digits Default Value Not stored Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings 4 3 6 2 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line Line 1 Line x Description Selects whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each line Note e The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 KX UT248 1 6 Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No 4 3 6 3 External RTP Port Channel 1 25 Description Specifies the external RTP port number used for voice communication for each channel Note s The number of channels available varies depending on the phone being used as follows KX UT113 KX UT123 1 3 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 1 25 Value Range 0 1024 49150 0 Disable even number only Note e Each chan
234. llowed for that setting Incorrect Example This is a simplified sample configuration file FE HE HE FE FE E E FE FE E E FE FE E FE FE FE HE FE FE FE d E FE FE FE FE FE FE E FE FE RTH HH HE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE HEHE Configuration Setting AE HE HE FE FE E HE FE FE E E FE FE E FE FE FE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE FE E FE FE AE HE FE FE E HE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE HEHE CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http config example com 0123456789AB cfg URL of this configuration file HERE EAE EE AE EE AE AE HE FE EE AE EH EE aE AE BE EA AE BE EH EH HEHE SIP Settings Suffix _1 indicates this parameter is for line 1 HERE AEE AEE HE FE AEE AE E HE FE FE E FE AE EEE EE EE EH EH HH SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 registrar example com IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server e SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 proxy example com IP Address or FQDN of proxy server Enables DNS SRV lookup SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1 Y ID password for SIP authentication SIP_AUTHID 1 SIP_User SIP PASS 1 SIP_Password Some Timer Settings Expiration time of SIP registration 1 hour REG_EXPIRE_TIME 1 3600 Disables SIP Session Timer RFC 4028 SIP_SESSION TIME _1 0 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 49 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 DTMF will be sent through SDP according to RFC 2833 OUTBANDDTMF 1 wy FE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE HE HE FE FE
235. lly If the global IP address has changed the new address will be registered to the SIP server Note e Ifthe unit is connected directly to the Internet or the network global address is static i e does not change you do not need to configure Global Address Detection Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Global Address Detection Network Global Address Detection Detection Method STUN OSIP Detection Interval 0 second s 10 65535 0 Disable Global Address STUN Server Detection Static NAPT Settings STUN Server Address STUN Server Port 3478 1 65535 Save Cancel 4 3 5 1 Global Address Detection Detection Method Description Selects the method to use for detecting the global IP address Value Range e STUN e SIP 90 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings Default Value STUN Detection Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds to wait between attempts to detect the global IP address Value Range 0 10 65535 0 Disable Note e When Detection Method is set to SIP the value 0 disables detection and a value other than 0 enables detection Default Value 4 3 5 2 STUN Server STUN Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored
236. log Settings 156 175 294 SYSLOG_ADDR 176 SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG 176 SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP 175 SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL 176 SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP 176 SYSLOG_PORT 177 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_n 177 System 63 System Settings 156 169 System Tab 63 95 System Time Settings 156 170 T T1 Timer 111 T2 Timer 111 Tab separated Value TSV TALK_PACKAGE 208 Talking URL 144 TCP IP Settings 18 TCP IP Settings DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment 18 Technical Support 2 Telephone 68 Telephone Settings 140 160 162 205 222 Telephone Tab 68 122 Telephone event Payload Type 116 TELEVENT_PAYLOAD 240 Terminal No 56 Terminal Number Settings 56 142 273 275 Document Version 2013 03 TFTP Server 34 35 179 Time 103 104 Time Adjust Settings Time Server 101 Time Zone 101 TIME_QUERY_INTVL 202 TIME_SYNC_INTVL 202 TIME_ZONE 170 TimerB 112 TimerD 112 TimerF 112 Timer for Dial Plan 124 TimerH 112 TimerJ 113 Timer Settings 111 Timing of Downloading 40 Tone Frequencies 136 137 138 139 Tone Settings 136 161 211 Tone Timings 137 138 139 140 TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT_HANDSET 210 TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT_HANDSFREE 210 TR 069 50 Trademarks 2 Transport Protocol 111 Transport Protocol of SIP 111 Troubleshooting 291 TSV gt Tab separated Value Type No 1 24 135 100 159 201 142 273 275 U UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT 191 Unconditional Enable Call Forward 131 Unconditional Phone Number 132 Update Firmware Button 147
237. lt Value 0 CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP Value Format String Description Specifies the value of the Event header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server Value Range Max 15 characters Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value check sync Web User Interface Reference Header Value for Resync Event Page 151 MAINTENANCE_WEB_RESET_ON_STARTUP Value Format Boolean Description Performs Reset Web Settings of the parameters below FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE FIRM UPGRADE AUTO FIRM FILE PATH PROVISION ENABLE CFG CYCLIC CFG CYCLIC_INTVL CFG _RESYNC_FROM SIP CFG STANDARD FILE PATH CFG PRODUCT FILE PATH CFG MASTER FILE PATH Value Range e Y Enable N Disable Default Value N 186 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 6 Management Server Settings 5 3 6 Management Server Settings ACS_URL Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the Auto Configuration Server for using TR 069 Note e This parameter must be in the form of a valid HTTP or HTTPS URL as defined in RFC 3986 Value Range Max 256 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Management Server URL Page 152 ACS_USER_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the user ID for the Auto Confi
238. lt your phone system dealer When TCP is used to transport the SIP messages you must always configure the devices for NAT Traversal To configure NAT Traversal you must have the following information The global IP address of the router e The port numbers you will specify for Source Port and External RTP Port through the Web user interface so that you can configure the appropriate port forwarding settings Note e Because the IP address of the router needs to be set in the unit the IP address must be static SIP Setup 28 It might be necessary to manually set the router s global IP address and reception port number in the unit In addition it might also be necessary to configure the port forwarding settings of the router so that packets sent from an outside network are sent to the unit These settings are required for each individual line For details about Web user interface programming see 4 3 6 Static NAPT Settings and 4 5 2 5 SIP Source Port Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 2 1 Reset RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each terminal on the network you must configure the RTP function for the unit and router so that the units can perform voice transmission between each other using a peer to peer connection However if your phone system supports the SBC Session Border Controller function it is
239. ly Description Selects the connection mode link speed and duplex mode of the PC port 82 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings Value Range e Auto Negotiation e 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 10 Mbps Half Duplex Note s The KX UT248 supports Gigabit Ethernet When connecting to a network that supports Gigabit Ethernet select Auto Negotiation Default Value Auto Negotiation 4 3 2 2 LLDP Settings Enable LLDP Description Selects whether to enable or disable sending and receiving LLDP frames Note e You should specify Yes for only one of LLDP VLAN or IEEE8021X e f Yes is specified for two or more of the parameters above the settings are prioritized as follows IEEE8021X gt VLAN gt LLDP Therefore if Yes is specified for both VLAN and LLDP the VLAN related settings are used Value Range Y Enable e N Disable Default Value Y Configuration File Reference LLDP_ENABLE Page 204 LLDP MED Interval timer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between sending each LLDP frame Value Range 1 3600 Default Value 30 Configuration File Reference LLDP_INTERVAL Page 204 IP Phone VLAN ID Description Indicates the VLAN ID of the phone using LLDP reference only Valu
240. ly when ANNEX_G STUN_ENABLE is set to Y Value Range 1 3600 Default Value 300 ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the minimum period in seconds that STUN Binding Requests can be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway This limit applies only to Binding Requests sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port and only those that do not contain the BINDING CHANGE attribute Note e This setting is available only when ANNEX_G STUN_ENABLE is set to Y Value Range 1 3600 Default Value 30 UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the minimum time in seconds between Active Notifications resulting from changes to the UDPConnectionRequestAddress if Active Notification is enabled Value Range 0 65535 Default Value 0 5 4 Network Settings 5 4 1 IP Settings CONNECTION_TYPE Value Format Integer Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 191 5 4 1 IP Settings Description Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically DHCP or manually static Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING_ENABLE is set to N Value Range e 1 DHCP e 0 Static Default Value 1 Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Setting
241. mal notation Default Value Empty string SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 252 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR 2 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP registrar server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 SIP_TIMER_T1_n Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER T1l_1 SIP_TIMER_T1_2 SIP_TIMER_T1_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the default interval in milliseconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details r
242. maximum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call s caller ID To specify exact matching of entire numbers only specify 0 Value Range 0 15 Default Value 10 Web User Interface Reference Number Matching Upper Digit Page 141 DISPLAY_DATE_PATTERN Value Format Integer 222 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 3 Telephone Settings Description Selects the display order pattern for the day and month of the date Value Range 0 2 0 Not specified 1 DDMM 2 MMDD Default Value 0 DISPLAY_TIME_PATTERN Value Format Integer Description Selects the display type for the time 12 or 24 hour format Value Range 0 2 0 Not specified 1 12H 2 24H Default Value 0 DEFAULT_LANGUAGE Value Format String Description Selects the language to use for the menus and display items on the phone Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 223 5 5 3 Telephone Settings Value Range Only the following values are available e en GB English UK e de German Er French e it Italian es Spanish e nl Dutch e se Swedish e da Danish e pt Portuguese e ru Russian e el Greek e pl Polish e cs Czech sk Slovak hu Hungarian hr Croatian e uk Ukrainian e en US English US e fr CA
243. meter Name Example USE_DEL_REG OPEN 1 USE_DEL_REG OPEN_2 USE_DEL_ REG OPEN 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when for example the unit is turned on 258 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e yY Enable cancelation before registration e N Disable cancelation before registration Default Value N USE DEL REG CLOSE_n Parameter Name Example USE_DEL_REG CLOSE_1 USE_DEL_REG CLOSE 2 Dep DEL REG CLOSE e Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of registration before the SIP function shuts down when for example the configuration has changed Value Range e Y Enable registration cancelation before shutting down e N Disable registration cancelation before shutting down Note e If setto Y registration cancelation is enabled e If set to N registration cancelation is disabled even when the SIP stack is shutting down Default Value PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1 PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2 PORT PUNCH_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information Note e This setting is ava
244. mpt to log in after changing the password In all other circumstances an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System l VolP Telephone Maintenance Change Administrator Password System Change Administrator Password en Current Password Admini New Password 6 16 characters Web Server Settings Confirm New Password 4 4 2 1 Change Administrator Password Current Password Description Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value adminpass Configuration File Reference ADMIN_PASS Page 169 New Password Description Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface 96 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 4 3 Change User Password Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference ADMIN_PASS Page 169 Confirm New Password Description Specifies the same password that you entered in New Password for confirmation Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note e This value must be the same as the value entered in New Password Default Value Not
245. n again or change the security settings of your Web browser Click Save on File Download window On the Save As window select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to enter the file name in File name select TSV File for Save as type and click Save If the file is downloaded successfully the Download complete window appears 6 Click Close 7 To exit the operation click the text HERE in the displayed message The Export Phonebook screen returns oP Note e Make sure that the import source or unit is in standby mode e The import source or unit must be specified at the time of import export The imported data is added to the existing phonebook data Ifthe existing phonebook data has an entry with the same record ID as an imported entry the entry is overwritten with the imported entry Ifthe existing phonebook data has an entry with no record ID it will be left in the phonebook If the imported phonebook data has an entry with no record ID the imported entry is added as a new entry unless an existing entry with the same name and phone number is found Phonebook entries that are added via the unit are not assigned record IDs Therefore it is recommended to export phonebook data from the unit assign record IDs manually and then re import them Doing so can help manage phonebook data The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations A maximum of 100 for the KX UT113 500 for the KX UT123 KX UT133
246. n the configuration file is downloaded The firmware update procedure is detailed below 288 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 7 4 Local Firmware Update The firmware update process Step 1 The unit downloads a configuration file from the provisioning server ji e For details about setting the timing of when U 5 configuration files are downloaded see s Configuration File 2 2 4 Downloading Configuration Files SIP Phone Provisioning Server The unit compares the version number of the Compare Version firmware in the configuration file to the unit s current AN 01 000 a N Provisioning Server Address Step 2 firmware version Current Version In this example the unit is using version 01 000 SIP Phone Provisioned M D and the configuration file specifies version 01 050 Configuration File e FIRM _VERSION 01 050 Step 3 http firm example com When a newer firmware version is specified in the firm 01 050 fw configuration file the unit will download the firmware from the address specified under FIRM FILE PATH in the configuration file gt g SIP Phone 01 050 fw Firmware Server Step 4 Once the newer firmware is downloaded it is applied to the unit and the unit automatically restarts Version 01 050 Version Updated 7 4 Local Firmware Update When an updated version of the firmware is provided on a Web site or other means you can perform the firmware upd
247. nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 79 4 3 1 3 El Le E 79 Static IP ee TEE 79 Subnet Mask 80 RE Nee 80 DNS WEE 80 ONSE ee 81 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings carsi nsn eaa a a aa E E Ea aar e EASi 81 4 3 2 1 Link Speed Duplex Mode cececcceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeaaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaaanieseeeeeeneeeeees 82 EN HIE e DEE 82 PC Port KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only 82 4 3 2 2 Eet Ee ee eeler 83 Enable LLDP uusuansnsnenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 83 LLDP MED Interval mer 83 IP Phone VLAN Diana andre 83 IP Sie PHOT E 84 PC VLAN ID KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only 00 84 PC Priority KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only 84 4 3 2 3 VUE Rn CN 84 Enable VAN 84 IP Phone LAIN ID EE 85 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Table of Contents IP PNAS CIP Te RE 85 PC VLAN ID KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT 136 KX UT248 only 00 00 85 PC Priority KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 on 85 4 3 3 IEEE802 1X Settings KX UT248 only 86 4 3 3 1 IEEE802 1X Settings cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeaeeaaaeeaeaaeeessessseeseees 86 Enable lEEE802 TX ae er nee E dinenines 86 4 3 3 2 IEEE802 1X Authentication nennen nennen nennen nen 87 Authentication Protocol 2 ccc cccccccccsccccsececssceeseccesectesscc
248. nd Administrator Each account has its own ID and password which are required to log in to the Web user interface Account Target User ID default Password default Password Restrictions User End users user blank NULL When logged in as User you can change the password for the User account gt see 4 4 3 Change User Password The password can consist of 6 to 16 ASCII characters case sensitive gt see Entering Characters in 1 1 6 4 Accessing the Web User Interface Administrator Network administrators etc admin adminpass When logged in as Administrator you can change the password for both the User and Administrator accounts gt see 4 4 2 Administrator Password e The password can consist of 6 to 16 ASCII characters case sensitive gt see Entering Characters in 1 1 6 4 Accessing the Web User Interface Notice Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time If you try to access the Web user interface while someone is logged in you will be denied access You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already logged in e The user password is required to change the settings e The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming gt see ADMIN_ID and USER_ID in 5 3 1 Login Account Settings You can reset the account IDs and passwords to their fac
249. nel must be set to a unique port number and all port numbers must be an even number e You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the port numbers specified for the individual lines in Source Port in 4 5 2 5 SIP Source Port In addition you cannot specify a port number that is 1 less than a port number specified in Source Port if the source port number is an odd number e All channels must be set to either enable or disable at the same time Default Value Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 93 4 3 7 Application Settings 4 3 7 Application Settings This screen allows you to configure settings related to the XML application feature Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Application Settings z gt Network Basic Network Settings Application Port Ethernet Port Settings Authentication ID Static NAPT Settings Application settings l Authentication Password Application Settings s666 1 655535 E OYes ONo Global Address Application Authentication Detection The phone reboots automatically if you modify this page s parameter Save Cancel 4 3 7 1 Application Settings Application Port Description Specifies the port number for receiving XML application data Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 6666 Configuration File Reference XML_HTTPD_PORT Page 233 Enable Application D
250. ng Problem Cause Solution account have lost the login password of the Web user interface for the Administrator or User Reset the password from the unit The passwords for both Administrator and User will be reset gt see 3 1 4 Reset Web ID Password For security reasons it is recommended that the passwords are set again immediately gt see 4 4 2 Administrator Password or 4 4 3 Change User Password Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 293 8 1 Troubleshooting Time Problem Cause Solution The time is not correct e In the Web user interface you can set NTP synchronization and DST Summer Time control to adjust the time automatically gt see 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings s Ifthe time is still incorrect even after setting NTP synchronization check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 7 Other Network Settings Error Codes When a system error occurs an error code is displayed on the unit Error code Probable Cause Solution 10001 MAC address error Consult your network administrator or phone system dealer 11001 11006 Device error Consult your network administrator or phone system dealer 21001 IEEE 802 1X Consult your network administrator or phone system authentication error dealer KX UT248 only 90001 Transmission error Check network settings e Unit not registered e Check that settings are
251. nge Max 4 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Direct Call Pickup Page 126 TALK_PACKAGE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the Click to Answer Retrieve functions Note e When this parameter is set to Y talk is added to the Allow Events header Value Range e y Enable Talk Package e N Disable Talk Package Default Value N HOLD_PACKAGE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the Click to Hold function Note e When this parameter is set to Y hold is added to the Allow Events header Value Range e y Enable Hold Package e N Disable Hold Package Default Value N HOLD_RECALL_TIM Value Format Integer 208 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 1 Call Control Settings Description Specifies the duration of the hold recall timer If set to 0 the function is disabled Value Range 0 240 0 Disable Default Value 60 AUTO_ANS_RING_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of seconds a phone in Auto Answer mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call Value Range 0 15 Default Value 5 RINGING_OFF_SETTING_ENABLE Value Format Boolean
252. nge e First Second e Third Fourth s Last Default Value Second Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY Page 174 Description Selects the day of the week on which DST Summer Time ends Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 103 4 5 1 SIP Settings Value Range e Sunday e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Default Value Sunday Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK Page 174 Time Description Specifies the end time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_TIME Page 174 4 5 VoIP This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the VoIP tab 4 5 1 SIP Settings This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance SIP Settings SIP User Agent Panasonic_ MODEL fwer mac Line 1 104 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x 4 5 1 1 SIP Setting SIP User Agent Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP messages Value Range Max 40 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty If mac is included in this field it will be replaced with the
253. nged through configuration file programming 3 The Web user interface window is displayed Configure the settings for the unit as desired 4 You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking Web Port Close Controls on the Window The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings The following figure shows the controls that are displayed on the Basic Network Settings screen as an example Panasonic KX UT136 VoIP Maintenance Network Telephone Status System Basic Network Settings Connection Mode DHCP O Static Ethernet Port Setti DHCP Settings HTTP Client Settings Global Address Host Name MODEL Detection e m Receive DNS server address automatically Domain Name Server o Ee EE DNS2 Web Port Close Static Settings Static IP Address 192 168 0123 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway j192168 010 DNS1 DNS2 e The screen shots shown are taken from the Web user interface of the KX UT136 or in some cases KX UT248 so the model name may differ from that shown on your PC e Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer e When you log in to the Web user interface with the User account the languages of messages displayed on the configuration screen may differ depending on the country area of use 24 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programmin
254. ngs configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone system dealer Note e Even if you specify Y this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it Before you configure this setting consult your phone system dealer e You cannot set both SHARED CALL ENABLE n and FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n to Y at the same time Value Range e y Enable Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization e N Disable Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward Page 128 RESOURCELIST_URI_n 244 Parameter Name Example RESOURCELIST URI_1 RESOURCELIST_URI_2 RESOURCELIST_URI_6 Value Format String Description Specifies the Uniform Resource Identifier string for the resource list which consists of sip a user part the symbol and a host part for example sip user example com For details refer to RFC 4662 Note e InaSIP URI the user part user in the example above can contain up to 63 characters and the host part example com in the example above can contain up to 127 characters e When the BLF feature is assigned to a flexible button it may be necessary to specify this parameter depending on your phone system For details about flexible buttons see 6 3 Flexible Buttons
255. nnnennnennnennnnnnnennennnennnennnnnsnennnnnsnensn sn ns 126 Direct Call Pickup En aE E E E A EAEN AE En E EENES 126 Call Rejection Phone Numbers cc ccccsescsseseseseseececceccneecenseeeeeneensennnnensseneeeseccess 126 eege eher 126 Call Control Line nes 126 E Uer el Lt EE 127 Display NaMe eege 127 Voice Mail Access Number EE 127 Enable Shared Call 128 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward cc sssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneneaa 128 Resource List UR 129 REI GT SE 129 Dial Plan max 1000 columns enee eebe enee ege 129 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match c c ccccceccsseeeneeeneeenenenesenseneesseseccseces 129 Gall FO E 130 Bl ck Galler ID ae en Run aan 130 Block Anonymous Call EE 130 BDONOtDIStU D EE 131 Call Forward ccccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeeeaaaeaaaaaaasaaaaeaaseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes 131 Unconditional Enable Call Forward 2 244 400s0404000000 nennen 131 Unconditional Phone Numben ia u een enden dee bees 132 Busy Enable ele EE 132 Busy Phone Number arena een een neuen 133 No Answer Enable Call Forward 2 4 nssnm4snnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnen 133 No Answer Phone Number zu neu 22 an e e g Seege egen eben 134 ING Answer CERN ee een 134 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only 2uuuusnereeeeen 135 Flexible EE Settings zus een 135 TYPE NO E EE 135
256. nsport Protocol Page 111 SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM DISPNAME_1 SIP_ANM DISPNAME 2 SIP_ANM DISPNAME_ 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the From header when making anonymous calls Value Range e 0 Use normal display name 1 Use Anonymous for display name e 2 Do not send a display name Default Value Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 263 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM USERNAME 1 SIP_ANM USERNAME 2 SIP_ANM USERNAME 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the From header when making anonymous calls Value Range e 0 Use normal user name e 1 Use anonymous for user name 2 Do not send a user name Default Value SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 1 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 2 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the From header when making anonymous calls Value Range e y Use anonymous invalid for host name s Nw Use normal host name Default Value N SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n Parameter Name Example SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_6 Value Format Boolean Desc
257. number of digits exceed the number of digits up to 2 characters before in the dial plan Does the user press ENTER or the key Does the dial plan include a No No Match No substitution rule and do the dialed digits match it The inter digit timer starts To A Yes To The number is substituted at y The call is initiated 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings To set Dial Plan Does the user press ENTER or the key Has Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match been set to Yes The call is initiated The call is denied 1 In the Web user interface click the Telephone tab and then click Call Control Line 1 Line x 2 In Dial Plan enter the desired dial format The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 279 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings For details about available characters for the dial format see Available Values for the Dial Plan Field in this section 3 a Yes or No for Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match If you select Yes the call will be made even ifthe user dials a phone number that does not match the dial format in Dial Plan e Ifyou select No the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial format in Dial Plan Note
258. oming call log that contains a symbol Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE Page 207 National Access Code Description When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a symbol and the country calling code matches the country calling code is removed and the national access code is added Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference NATIONAL_ACCESS_ CODE Page 207 Default Line for Outgoing Description Specifies the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is specified in the dialing operation Note e The available line number may vary depending on the type of the unit being used Value Range 1 2 for KX UT113 KX UT 123 1 4 for KX UT133 KX UT 136 1 6 for KX UT248 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT Page 207 Flash Recall Button Description Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a conversation Value Range e Terminate Flash Hook Default Value Terminate Configuration File Reference FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE Page 245 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 125 4 6 2 Call Control Line 1 Line x Flash Hook Event
259. on Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of the hold tone using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 425 HOLD_TONE_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of the hold tone Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 219 5 5 2 Tone Settings HOLD_TONE_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether the hold tone is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 HOLD_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of the hold tone using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 500 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 500 190 190 190 2890 BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_ TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 1 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using up to 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time
260. one LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX Page 175 TR 106 Device ManagementServer URL ACS_URL Page 187 TR 106 Device ManagementServer Username ACS_USER_ID Page 187 TR 106 Device ManagementServer Password ACS_PASS Page 187 TR 106 Device ManagementServer PeriodicInfo PERIODIC_INFORM ENABLE Page 187 rmEnable TR 106 Device ManagementServer PeriodicInfo PERIODIC_INFORM INTERVAL Page 188 rminterval TR 106 Device ManagementServer PeriodicInfo PERIODIC_INFORM TIME Page 188 rmTime 50 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 Parameter Name Requirement Ref TR 069 Parameter Configuration File Parameter TR 106 Device ManagementServer Connection CON_REQ USER_ID Page 188 RequestUsername TR 106 Device ManagementServer Connection CON_REQ PASS Page 189 RequestPassword TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNEnabl ANNEX_G STUN_ENABLE Page 189 e TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNServe ANNEX_G STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 189 rAddress TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNServe ANNEX_G STUN_SERV_PORT Page 190 rPort TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNUsern ANNEX_G STUN_USER_ID Page 190 ame TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNPass ANNEX_G STUN_PASS Page 190 word TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNMaxi ANNEX_G STUN_MAX KEEP AL Page 190 mumKeepAlivePeriod IVE TR 106 Device ManagementServer STUNMinim ANNEX_G
261. onfiguration files from the provisioning server of your phone system 148 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 7 3 Provisioning Maintenance Note 2 2 Provisioning Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System Web Port Close Maintenance Local Firmware Update Provisioning Maintenance Management Server Enable Provisioning Standard File URL Product File URL Master File URL Cyclic Auto Resync Resync Interval VoIP Each unit can accept up to 3 configuration files For details about provisioning see Telephone Maintenance Provisioning Maintenance Provisioning Maintenance Ges ONo http provisioning e connecting net redirect cor OYes No 10080 minute s 1 40320 Header Value for Resync Save check sync 4 7 3 1 Provisioning Maintenance Enable Provisioning Description Selects whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system Note Downloading configuration files using TR 069 can be performed regardless of this setting Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference PROVISION_ENABLE Page 180 Standard File URL Description Specifies the URL ofthe standard configuration file which is used when every unit needs different settings Note When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes a
262. onfigured from the Web user interface or the phone user interface According to the table settings configured later override previous settings i e settings listed lower in the table have a higher priority If different values are specified for the same setting by the master configuration file and Web user interface programming the value specified from the Web user interface is applied This is because values specified from the Web user interface have a higher priority For settings configured from the Web user interface and the phone user interface the value specified most recently receives priority Notice Make sure to perform Reset to Factory Default before connecting the unit to a different phone system For details see 1 2 1 1 Resetting to Factory Default Factory Setting 2 4 Configuration File Specifications 46 The specifications of the configuration files are as follows File Format The configuration file is in plain text format File Size The maximum size of a configuration file is 120 KB Regardless of the number of configuration files the total size of the configuration files must be 120 KB or less Lines in Configuration Files A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines with the following conditions e Each line must end with lt CR gt lt LF gt The maximum length of a line is 537 bytes including lt CR gt lt LF gt The following lines are ignored Lines that excee
263. onfirmation of the root certificate will be verified e If setto 2 precise certificate verification is enabled In this case the validity of the server name will be verified in addition to the items verified when 1 is set e Ifthe unit has not obtained the current time verification will not be performed irrelevant of this setting In order to perform verification it is necessary to first set up the NTP server Default Value CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URI of the root certificate Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 500 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt scheme gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 128 characters lt password gt must be less than 128 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt scheme gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 245 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number Default Value Empty string 5 4 6 Time Adjust Settings NTP_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or
264. or Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings IP Phone VLAN ID Description Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable IEEE802 1X is set to Yes KX UT248 only Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 2 Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE Page 196 IP Phone Priority Description Selects the priority number for the unit Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable IEEE802 1X is set to Yes KX UT248 only Value Range 0 7 Default Value 7 Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE Page 197 PC VLAN ID KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable IEEE802 1X is set to Yes KX UT248 only Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_PC Page 197 PC Priority KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Description Selects the priority number for the PC Note e You cannot set this parameter if Enable IEEE802 1X is set to Yes KX UT248 only Value Range 0 7 Default Value 0 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 85 4 3 3 IEEE802 1X Settings KX UT248 only Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_PC Page 197
265. ormat Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of Dial Tone 4 stutter type dial tone Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 213 5 5 2 Tone Settings Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE4_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 4 stutter type dial tone is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 0 DIAL_TONE4_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of Dial Tone 4 stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using up to 22 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 560 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 0 100 100 100 100 100 0 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 139 BUSY_TONE_FRQ 214 Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 137
266. ormat String Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server Value Range Max 127 characters except A lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 109 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 SIp PASS n 5 7 2 SIP Settings Parameter Name Example SIP_PASS_1 SIP_PASS 2 SIP_PASS 6 Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 110 SIP_SRC_PORT_n Parameter Name Example SIP_SRC_PORT_1 SIP_SRC_PORT_2 SIP_SRC_PORT_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication Value Range 1024 49151 Note s The SIP port number for each line must be unique Default Value 5060 for SIP_SRC_PORT_1 5070 for SIP_SRC_PORT_2 5080 for SIP_SRC_PORT 3 5090 for SIP_SRC_PORT_4 5100 for SIP_SRC_PORT_5 5110 for SIP_SRC_PORT_6 Web User Interface Reference Source Port Page 109 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_6 V
267. orresponding external RTP port is enabled e The available channel number varies depending on the type of the unit being used Value Range 1424 49150 even number only Note The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to Minimum RTP Port Number 400 Changing this setting may affect the number of simultaneous calls that can be made Therefore when setting this parameter be aware that the maximum number of necessary ports can be calculated as shown below No of lines x No of channels x 2 x 10 No of terminals Default Value 20000 Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MAX Page 237 Telephone event Payload Type 116 Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones Note e This setting is available only when DTMF Type is set to Outband Value Range 96 127 Default Value 101 Configuration File Reference TELEVENT_PAYLOAD Page 240 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x 4 5 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line x This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are specific to each line The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used as follows Panasonic KX UT136 Web Port Close VoIP VolP Settings Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Status Network KX UT113 KX UT123 1 2 KX UT133 KX UT136 1 4 KX UT248 1 6 System VoIP
268. ort Export Operation 2 02 cc ceccccccccccceeeccceeeceaeeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 274 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft E 275 6 1 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook a2 ieee 277 6 2 Dial Plan E 278 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings E 279 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only cccceceeeeeeeeneeeeeneneeeeeneeeeeeees 282 6 3 1 Flexible Bullon Sellings sa ae tect tena TEKEE 283 7 Firmware Update u sea 287 7 1 Firmware Server Setup uuuunsuunnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnnnnnnnannnn nn 288 7 2 el TEE Uu te D 288 7 3 Executing Firmware Update ican seitassninriniiereninenntnwencarsnaiedenladadssdnasdduaievcansdaniadeusvdsadveedinsies 288 7 4 Local Firmware Update 2eekeekkiegkkeuegeEudENE dek ege ENEE eech 289 8 Troubleshooting RE 291 8 1 Troubleshooting unse ee 292 3 Appendix naeh 297 9 1 Revision HIStory wii nn ee 298 9 1 1 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 025 298 9 1 2 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 Software File Version 01 080 299 9 1 3 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version OT E E 300 9 1 4 KX UT113 KX UT 123 KX UT133 KX UT 136 KX UT248 Software File Version A EE 300 MNO EE 303 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 1 Initial Setup This section provides an overview of the setup procedures for the unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator
269. ou encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when transferring configuration files However if you are using the units within a secure environment such as within an intranet it is not necessary to encrypt the data To decrypt configuration files the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand The unit determines the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file For details about encrypting configuration files contact the appropriate person in your organization Extension of Configuration Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting File e1c CFG _FILE_KEY1 e2c CFG_FILE_KEY2 eich CFG _FILE_KEY3 eich Other than e1c e2c and Processed as unencrypted configuration files The extension cfg should be used for unencrypted configuration files Comparison of the 2 Methods The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS Provisioning server load Light Heavy The server encrypts data for each transmission Operation load Necessary to encrypt data beforehand Unnecessary to encrypt data beforehand Management of configuration files Files must be decrypted and re encrypted for maintenance It is easy to manage files because they are not encrypted on the server Sec
270. parameter title should be changed to one of the following numbers according to the codec to be changed 0 G 722 1 PCMA 2 G6 726 32 3 G 729A 4 PCMU For codec setting examples see 2 5 1 Examples of Codec Settings Value Range 1 255 Default Value Web User Interface Reference e G722 Priority Page 120 PCMA Priority Page 121 e G726 32 Priority Page 121 e G729A Priority Page 122 PCMU Priority Page 122 5 6 2 RTP Settings DSCP_RTP_n Parameter Name Example DSCP_RTP_1 DSCP_RTP_2 DSCP_RTP_6 Value Format Integer Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet QoS DSCP Page 117 DSCP_RTCP_n Parameter Name Example DSCP_RTCP_1 DSCP_RTCP_2 DSCP_RTCP_6 Value Format Integer Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP packets Value Range 0 63 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference RTCP Packet QoS DSCP Page 117 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 235 5 6 2 RTP Settings RTCP_INTVL_n Parameter Name Example RTCP_INTVL_1 RTCP_INTVL_2 RTCP_INTVL_6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between RTCP packets Value Range 5 655
271. ption Specifies the authentication password used for IEEE 802 1X authentication Note e This setting is available only when VLAN_ENABLE is set to N Value Range Max 127 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 87 5 4 5 HTTP Settings HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether the units Web port is always open Value Range Notice Y Web port is always open N Web port is closed can be opened temporarily through phone user interface programming e Ifyou want to set to Y please fully recognize the possibility of unauthorized access to the unit through the Web user interface and change this setting at your own risk In addition please take full security measures for connecting to an external network and control all passwords for logging in to the Web user interface Default Value Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 199 5 4 5 HTTP Settings HTTP_VER Value Format Integer Description Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication Value Range e 1 Use HTTP 1 0 e 0 Use HTTP 1 1 Note e For this unit it is strongly recommended that you specify 1 for this setting However if the HTTP server does not function well with HTTP 1 0 try changing the setting 0
272. ption Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G 726 32 codec Value Range 1 255 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 G729A Enable Description Selects whether to enable the G 729A codec for voice data transmission Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 121 4 6 Telephone G729A Priority Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G 729A codec Value Range 1 255 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 PCMU Enable Description Selects whether to enable the PCMU codec for voice data transmission Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n Page 234 PCMU Priority Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMU codec Value Range 1 255 Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Page 234 4 6 Telephone This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Telephone tab 122 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 6 1 Call Control 4 6 1 Call Control This screen allows you to configure v
273. ption Selects the number of the week on which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e First Second e Third Fourth Last Default Value Second Configuration File Reference DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY Page 172 Description Selects the day of the week on which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e Sunday e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Default Value Sunday Configuration File Reference DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK Page 172 102 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings Time Description Specifies the start time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Configuration File Reference DST_START_TIME Page 173 4 4 5 6 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time Month Description Selects the month in which DST Summer Time ends Value Range e January e February e March e April e May e June e July e August e September e October es November e December Default Value October Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_MONTH Page 173 Day of Week Using the 2 following settings specify on which day of the selected month DST Summer Time ends For example to specify the second Sunday select Second and Sunday Description Selects the number of the week on which DST Summer Time ends Value Ra
274. r Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n Page 258 4 5 2 3 Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n Page 262 Outbound Proxy Server Port 108 Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n Page 263 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line x 4 5 2 4 SIP Service Domain Service Domain Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the symbol Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n Page 250 4 5 2 5 SIP Source Port Source Port Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication Value Range 1024 49151 Note e You cannot specify here the same port num
275. r Port v Page 108 Presence Server Address v Page 108 Presence Server Port v Page 108 Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server v Page 108 Address Outbound Proxy Server Port v Page 108 SIP Service Domain Service Domain v Page 109 SIP Source Port Source Port v Page 109 SIP Authentication Authentication ID v Page 109 Authentication Password v Page 110 DNS Enable DNS SRV lookup v Page 110 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP v Page 110 SRV lookup Prefix for TCP v Page 111 Transport Protocol of Transport Protocol v Page 111 SIP Timer Settings T1 Timer v Page 111 T2 Timer v Page 111 Timer B v Page 112 Timer D v Page 112 Timer F v Page 112 Timer H v Page 112 Timer J v Page 113 Quality of Service QoS SIP Packet QoS DSCP v Page 113 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 65 4 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A SIP extensions Supports 100rel RFC 3262 v Page 113 Supports Session Timer RFC v Page 113 4028 NAT Identity Keep Alive Interval v Page 114 Supports Rport RFC 3581 v Page 114 Security Enable SSAF SIP Source v Page 114 Address Filter VoIP Settings RTP Settings RTP Packet Time v Page 115 Minimum RTP Port Number v Page 115 Maximum RTP Port Number v Page 116 Telephone event Payload v Page 116 Type Vo
276. rameter Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range 1 5 1 the first week of the month 2 the second week of the month 3 the third week of the month 4 the fourth week of the month 5 the fifth week of the month Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 103 DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK Value Format Integer Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST Summer Time ends Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday l OaRWN A CO Default Value Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 103 DST_STOP_TIME Value Format Integer 174 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 3 Syslog Settings Description Specifies the end time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Web User Interface Reference Time Page 104 LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX Value Format String Description Specifies a IEEE 1003 1 POSIX compliant local time zone definition e g EST 5 00 00EDT 4 00 00 M4 1 0 2 00 00 M10
277. rd eege EEN EE EE 97 New Password uuuunsuunnssnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn 98 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 5 Table of Contents 6 Confirm New Password 98 4 4 4 Web Serer Settings ee 98 4 4 4 1 Web Server SUNS zus nee ee een 99 Web Server Port 99 Pon Glose Timer san ee dege edu Hannah nahe rennen endende 99 4 4 5 UPTV PAGS SEUNS ege 100 4 4 5 1 EE gege Eeer 100 Enable Synchronization by NTP aussen stebieners 100 Synchronization Interval EE 100 4 4 5 2 Time Server eer aa D a E ery e reer reer rrr ree 101 NTP Server Address cccccccccceeceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeaeeeaaeeaaaeaaaaaaaeaaaeasaeaaseneeseeeeeseeeeneeeees 101 4 4 5 3 TIME Zone ee ee rere te nae rer en renee 101 MME ZONE EE 101 4 4 5 4 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time EEEERSESERKSEEEREEEEREEEEEREEEERREKEEEREEENEEESEEEREEEEEEH 101 Enable DST Enable Summer Time 2222 2 cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseseseceseneneeeneees 101 DST Offset Summer Time Offset une anne aa a 101 4 4 5 5 Start Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Tmel 102 MOHN a er see ee E Er nenne 102 Re EE 102 RI 103 4 4 5 6 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time 103 IMO BEE 103 Re e 103 RI 104 4 5 VT 104 4 5 1 SIP SEUNS EE 104 4 5 1 1 SIP ee WN Sg ssn na E e Ee eS Eaa aE T EN DEREN 105 SIP USer Agent EE 105 4 5 2 SIP Settings Line 1lUmnexvi nennen 105 4 5 2
278. re performing Factory Setting 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Network Settings IP Reset Performing IP Reset from the phone user interface restores the basic network settings made through phone user interface programming Web user interface programming or configuration file programming to their factory defaults If the unit is unable to connect to the network after changing network settings you can restore the network settings to their factory defaults by performing IP Reset and then try configuring the settings again Apart from Call Rejection Phone Numbers all Web user interface and configuration file programming settings will be reset to their factory defaults However settings such as the phonebook data are not cleared by this feature To perform this initialization follow the procedure below 1 Press ES or ES 2 Press 1 3 6 3 Press 4 or Y to select IP Reset and then press ENTER 4 Press 4 or Y to select Yes and then press ENTER 5 Press 4 or Y to select Yes and then press ENTER Notice e After performing IP Reset the unit will restart automatically To avoid problems it is recommended that you save your settings before performing IP Reset 1 2 1 3 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web Settings Performing Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface gt see 4 7 5 Reset to Defaults resets the settings made through the Web user interface to their default val
279. re provisioning Setting Example 36 Item Description Setting Provisioning server name where the configuration file used for provisioning is to be stored provisioning example com Distribution directory of the provisioning server Panasonic File name of the configuration file used for provisioning Config0080F0123456 cfg URL of the configuration file used for provisioning http provisioning example com Panasonic Config0080F0123456 cfg Prior Settings Item Description Setting DHCP server option 66 192 168 0 130 IP address range assigned by DHCP server 192 168 0 16 to 192 168 0 63 File name of the configuration file used for pre provisioning KX UTxxx cfg URL of the configuration file used for provisioning that is entered in the configuration file CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http provisioning example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg Note e MAC is replaced by the MAC address of the unit e g 0080F0123456 Stored location of the configuration file on the TFTP server Configuration file KX UTxxx cfg is stored in the directory tftproot Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 1 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example The pre provisioning process Step 1 Connect the unit to the network and turn the power Power on on The unit is assigned an IP address by the DHCP gt server and also receives the TFTP s
280. rface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section e Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 7 Other Network Settings For details about the settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer The unit will not start up correctly Web user interface settings or configuration file settings may not be correct Perform the following procedure to initialize the settings and then reconfigure the unit correctly 1 Press ESO 2 Press 1 3 6 3 Press A or Y to select IP Reset and then press ENTER 4 Press a or Y to select yes and then press ENTER 5 Press a or Y to select Yes and then press ENTER After performing IP Reset the unit will restart automatically Note e If settings were not initialized after performing this procedure consult your phone system dealer 292 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 8 1 Troubleshooting Making Answering Calls Intercom Problem Cause Solution The unit does not ring Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section
281. ription Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server Value Range Y Enable SSAF e N Disable SSAF Note e If setto Y the unit receives SIP messages only from the source addresses stored in the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server and not from other addresses However if SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n in 5 7 2 SIP Settings is specified the unit also receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound proxy server Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter Page 114 264 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n 5 7 2 SIP Settings Parameter Name Example SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_1 SIP_RCV_DET_ HEADER 2 SIP_RCV_DET HEADER 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to check the username part of the SIP URI in the To header when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI Value Range y Enable username check e N Disable username check Note e If set to Y the unit will return an error reply when it receives the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI e Ifsetto N the unit will not check the username part of the SIP URI in the To header Default Value SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n Parameter Name Example SIP_CONTACT_O
282. ription Indicates the current VoIP status of each line reference only 76 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings Value Range Registered The unit has been registered to the SIP server and the line can be used Registering The unit is being registered to the SIP server and the line cannot be used Blank The line has not been leased the unit has not been configured yet or a SIP authentication failure has occurred Note Immediately after starting up the unit the phone numbers of the lines will be displayed but the status of the line may not be displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP server To display the status wait about 30 to 60 seconds and then click Refresh to obtain updated status information Default Value Not applicable 4 3 Network This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Network tab 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server and the IP address of the unit Note e Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message Complete appears after clicking Save Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these settings you will not be able to continue using the Web user interface To continue configuring the unit from the Web user interface
283. ription Specifies the gain in decibels of the reorder tone Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 REORDER_TONE_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether the reorder tone is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 REORDER_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of reorder tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 250 190 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 140 RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of ringback tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 440 480 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 138 216 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 5 2 Tone Settings RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of the ringback tone Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 RINGBACK_TONE_RPT Value Forma
284. rmware File URL Reset to Defaults Automatic O Manual 4 7 1 1 Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update Description Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit e Local firmware updates from the Web user interface gt see 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update can be performed regardless of this setting e Firmware updates using TR 069 can be performed regardless of this setting 146 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Page 177 Update Type Description Selects whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to perform a firmware update manual or perform the firmware update without asking the user automatic when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note e This setting is available only when Enable Firmware Update is set to Yes Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Automatic e Manual Default Value Automatic Configuration File Reference FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Page 178 Firmware File URL Description Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored Note e This setting is available only when Enable Firmware Update i
285. rt it to the unit For details see 6 1 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel e First and middle names are not exported using this procedure You can export all necessary items and edit the entry before importing them to the unit e Inthe file exported from Microsoft Outlook fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the default character encoding for your operating system 6 2 Dial Plan The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network Dial plan settings can be configured on a per line basis These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface gt see 4 6 2 2 Dial Plan or by configuration file programming gt see 5 7 1 Call Control Settings 278 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings Dial Plan Flowchart When a user dials a single digit on a unit the following sequence of events begins A user dials a single digit on the unit The unit stores each digit dialed before the inter digit timer expires The unit compares the dialed digits with each dial plan when the inter digit timer expires B gt Do the dialed digits fully or partially match in the dial plan Yes Complete Match Partial Match Does the dial plan contain for number barring Does the dial plan contain for element repetition To A The call is denied Y Does the dialed
286. s of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference Connection Mode Page 78 HOST_NAME Value Format String Description Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 1 Value Range Max 63 characters Note An empty string is not allowed s If MODEL is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name Default Value MODEL Web User Interface Reference Host Name Page 78 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to assign a DNS server addresses up to 2 manually Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 1 and when NW_SETTING_ ENABLE is set to N Value Range e y Use USER_DNS1_ADDR or USER_DNS1_ADDR and USER_DNS2_ADDR N Receive DNS server address automatically Default Value N 192 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 4 1 IP Settings Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Web User Interface Reference Domain Name Server Page 79 STATIC_IP_ADDRESS Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address for the unit Note e This setting is available only when
287. s set to Yes Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference FIRM_FILE_PATH Page 178 4 7 2 Local Firmware Update This screen allows you to manually update the unit s firmware from a PC by clicking Update Firmware Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 147 4 7 3 Provisioning Maintenance Note After the firmware has been successfully updated the unit will restart automatically Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone N Maintenance Local Firmware Update Web Port Close Maintenance Local Firmware Update Firmware Maintenance Encryption Yes ONo Local Firmware Update Provisioning File Name L o Eoee Maintenance 4 7 2 1 Local Firmware Update Encryption Description Selects whether the firmware files are encrypted or not Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes File Name Description Specifies the path of the firmware file to be imported Value Range No limitation Note There are no limitations for the field entry However it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error Default Value Not stored 4 7 3 Provisioning Maintenance This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the c
288. secondary STUN server Note e This setting is available only when STUN_SERV_ADDR is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string STUN_2NDSERV_PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 5 4 8 Miscellaneous Network Settings NW_SETTING_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the network settings from the unit Note e Ifyou change this setting to N when the network settings with the exception of HOST_NAME in 5 4 1 IP Settings have been made through Web user interface programming clear these settings once by performing Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface and then change this setting to N Value Range e yY Enable network settings e N Disable network settings Default Value H CUSTOM WER PAGE Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to enable the settings in 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings and 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings from the Web user interface when logged in with the User account Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 203 5 4 9 LLDP MED Settings Value Range 0 3 0 Enable Basic Network Settings and Time Adjust Settings 1 Disable Basic Network Settings 2 Disable Time Adjust Settings 3
289. server Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to DHCP 78 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 3 1 Basic Network Settings Value Range Max 63 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty e If MODEL is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name Default Value MODEL Configuration File Reference HOST_NAME Page 192 Domain Name Server Description Selects whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to assign a DNS server addresses up to 2 manually Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to DHCP Value Range e Receive DNS server address automatically e Use the following settings DNS1 DNS2 Note e Ifyou select Use the following settings specify the IP address es of the primary and if necessary secondary DNS server s manually The permissible values are Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Receive DNS server address automatically Phone User Interface Reference Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit Page 19 Configuration File Reference DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Page 192 4 3 1 3 Static Settings Static IP Address Description Specifies the IP address for the unit Note e This setting is avai
290. stored Configuration File Reference ADMIN_PASS Page 169 4 4 3 Change User Password This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Note e For security reasons the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters which differ depending on the Web browser e After you change the user password the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears Two consecutive login failures will result in an error 401 Unauthorized This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the password In all other circumstances an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Change User Password system Current Password Administrator Password Change User Password I New Password Qe oa Confirm New Password Time Adjust Settings 6 16 characters Save Cancel 4 4 3 1 Change User Password Current Password Description Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Value Range Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 97 98 4 4 4 Web Server Settings Default Value Not stored
291. t Integer Description Specifies whether the ringback tone is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of ringback tones using up to 10 whole numbers off 1 on 1 off 2 on 2 separated by commas Note e Itis recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value off 1 Value Range 0 16000 0 Infinite time Note Avoid setting 1 50 for any of the values Default Value 60 2000 3940 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 138 HOLD ALARM FRO Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of the hold alarm using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 2000 0 No tone Default Value 425 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 217 5 5 2 Tone Settings HOLD_ALARM_GAIN Value Format Integer Description Specifies the gain in decibels of the hold alarm Value Range 24 6 Default Value 0 HOLD_ALARM_RPT Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether the hold alarm is repeated Value Range 0 1 0 No Repeat 1 Repeat Default Value 1 HOLD_ALARM_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern
292. t Value 603 SIP_FOVR_MODE_n Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether INVITE SUBSCRIBE will also follow the REGISTER Failover result Value Range Y INVITE SUBSCRIBE will follow the REGISTER Failover result N INVITE SUBSCRIBE will not follow the REGISTER Failover result Default Value N SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of transmission times for the REGISTER method at the Failover destination Value Range 0 10 Default Value 0 268 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether or not to add Route headers when setting OutBoundProxy Note e Route headers are not added when OutBoundProxy and other server settings are the same Value Range Y Route headers are added N Route headers are not added Default Value Y SIP_403_ REG SUB _RTX_n Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether or not to send a request when a 403 Forbidden reply is received from the server in response to an INVITE or SUBSCRIBE Value Range e Y Send N Do not send Default Value N Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 269 5 7 2 SIP Settings 270 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 6 Useful Telephone Functions
293. t of an ACD group on line 1 Button 2 is set to enable or disable talking using the headset e Buttons 3 and 4 are set to make receive calls on line 1 using ringtone 1 Buttons 5 and 6 are set to make receive calls on line 2 using ringtone 2 e Buttons 7 and 8 are set to make calls to a certain destination using the One Touch Dialing feature e Buttons 9 10 and 11 are set to show the status of a certain extension They can also be used to call that extension and transfer calls to it You can also assign extension numbers automatically to BLF buttons using the information in the server s resource list without having to input information here Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 285 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings 286 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 7 Firmware Update This section explains how to update the firmware of the unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 287 7 3 Executing Firmware Update 7 1 Firmware Server Setup No special server is necessary for the firmware update You can use an HTTP HTTPS FTP or TFTP server as the firmware server by simply setting its URL 7 2 Firmware Update Settings Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file programming gt see 5 3 4 Firmware Update Settings or Web user interface programming gt see
294. t the same time Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value http provisioning e connecting net redirect conf mac cfg Configuration File Reference CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH Page 180 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 149 4 7 3 Provisioning Maintenance Product File URL Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings Note e When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes at the same time Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value Not stored Note s The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Configuration File Reference CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH Page 181 Master File URL Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file which is used when all units need the same settings Note s When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes at the same time Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value Not stored Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Configuration File Reference CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH Page 182 Cyclic Auto Resync 150 Description Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Confi
295. tails refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction For details about additional features available with direct commands see Section 3 Phone User Interface Programming Configuring Settings from the Unit To open the unit s Web port 1 Press BI or TB 2 Press 5 3 4 3 Press 4 or Y to select On for Embedded web and then press ENTER To close the unit s Web port 1 Press GIB or Em 2 Press 5 3 4 3 Press 4 or Y to select O for Embedded web and then press ENTER Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface To close the unit s Web port 1 Inthe Web user interface click Web Port Close 2 Click OK Note e The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions The port close timer configured through the Web user interface expires gt see Port Close Timer in 4 4 4 1 Web Server Settings 3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur e The Web port can be set to stay open continuously through Configuration file programming gt see HTTPD PORTOPEN AUTO in 5 4 5 HTTP Settings However please recognize the possibility of unauthorized access to the unit by doing so Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Access Levels IDs and Passwords 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming 2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface User a
296. terface Reference Registrar Server Port Page 107 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n 250 Parameter Name Example SIP_SVCDOMAIN 1 SIP_SVCDOMAIN 2 SIP_SVCDOMAIN 6 Value Format String Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the symbol Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Service Domain Page 109 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 7 2 SIP Settings REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n Parameter Name Example REG EXPIRE TIME 1 REG EXPIRE TIME 2 REG EXPIRE TIME 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the registration remains valid This value is set in the Expires header of the REGISTER request Value Range 1 4294967295 Default Value 3600 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n Parameter Name Example REG INTERVAL RATE 1 REG INTERVAL_RATE_2 REG INTERVAL RATE 6 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the percentage of the expires value after which to refresh registration by sending anew REGISTER message in the same dialog Value Range 1 100 Default Value 90 SIP_SESSION_TIME_n Parameter Name Example SIP_SESSION TIME 1 SIP_SESSION_TIME 2 SIP_SESSION_TIME e Value Form
297. the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 171 5 3 2 System Time Settings Value Range 0 720 Note e This parameter is usually set to 60 Default Value 60 Web User Interface Reference DST Offset Summer Time Offset Page 101 DST_START_MONTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the month in which DST Summer Time starts Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range Default Value Web User Interface Reference Month Page 102 DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST Summer Time starts The actual start day is specified in DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK For example to specify the second Sunday specify 2 in this parameter and 0 in the next parameter Note e This parameter is disabled when the LOCAL TIME ZONE POSIX parameter is specified Value Range 1 5 1 the first week of the month 2 the second week of the month 3 the third week of the month 4 the fourth week of the month 5 the fifth week of the month Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 102 DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK Value Format Integer 172 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 3 2
298. tory default settings by performing Reset Web ID Password from the unit For details see 3 1 4 Reset Web ID Password 1 1 6 4 Accessing the Web User Interface The unit can be configured from the Web user interface To access the Web user interface 1 Open your Web browser and then enter http followed by the unit s IP address into the address field of your browser Note e To determine the unit s IP address perform the following operations on the unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 23 1 1 6 Web User Interface Programming 1 Press EM or SD 2 Press a or V to select Information Display and then press ENTER 3 Press 4 or Y to select IP Address 4 Press CANCEL 2 For authentication enter your ID username and password and then click OK Notice e The default ID for the User account is user and the default password is blank The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface but it can be changed through configuration file programming When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time the Change User Password screen see 4 4 3 Change User Password will be displayed Enter a new password and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user interface e The default ID for the Administrator account is admin and the default password is adminpass The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface but it can be cha
299. ttings 284 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Button Description Value Description Value DN Ringtone 1 32 Line No e 1 4 for KX UT133 KX UT 136 e 1 6 for KX UT248 One Touch Phone Number Up to 32 digits Headset BLF Extension Up to 32 digits Number ACD Line No e 1 4 for KX UT133 KX UT136 e 1 6 for KX UT248 Wrap Up Line No e 1 4 for KX UT133 KX UT136 e 1 6 for KX UT248 You can also assign extension numbers automatically to BLF buttons using the information in the server s resource list without having to input information here Note e For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming see 5 5 5 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Setting Example The following screen shows an example of setting flexible buttons Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Flexible Button Settings Web Port Close Telephone Flexible Button Settings No Type Parameter Label Name d ACD v 1 ACD1 I m r er TE i J One Touch 0123456789 Office 8 One Touch 1112223333 Home 9 BLF v 301 301 10 BLF v 302 302 11 BLF v 303 303 Description Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings e Button 1 is set to log in and log ou
300. ttings DTMF_RELAY_n Page 240 Changed Contents e 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 Page 50 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 299 9 1 4 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version 01 xxx 9 1 3 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version 01 160 New Contents e 3 1 5 Sound Quality KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT 136 only Page 57 e 4 3 2 2 LLDP Settings Page 83 5 4 9 LLDP MED Settings Page 204 Changed Contents e 2 1 3 Server for Pre provisioning Page 35 e 3 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands Page 56 4 3 2 Ethernet Port Settings Page 81 e 4 3 2 3 VLAN Settings Page 84 e 4 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings Page 135 e 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings Page 179 e 5 5 1 Call Control Settings Page 205 5 5 3 Telephone Settings Page 222 e 5 5 4 Miscellaneous Telephone Settings Page 225 e 5 5 5 Flexible Button Settings KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Page 227 5 5 6 XML Application Settings Page 228 e 5 7 2 SIP Settings Page 246 e 6 2 1 Dial Plan Settings Page 279 e 6 3 Flexible Buttons KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 only Page 282 e 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings Page 283 9 1 4 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 Software File Version 01 250 New Contents e 5 3 5 Provisioning Settings 300 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 9 1 4 KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT 133 KX UT136 KX U
301. u can use the unit on your network You must configure the following network settings e TCP IP settings DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol or static IP address assignment e DNS server settings TCP IP Settings DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment 18 A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network How you assign an IP address depends on your network environment This unit supports the following 2 methods for assigning an IP address Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running on your network With this method the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up For details about the DHCP server consult your network administrator Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator you will need to manually configure settings such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS servers For details about the required network settings consult your network administrator Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup DNS Server Settings You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers a primary DNS server and
302. udience 2 Authentication ID 87 89 94 109 145 152 Authentication Password 87 89 95 110 146 152 Authentication Protocol 87 AUTO_ANS_RING_TIM 209 AUTO_CALL_HOLD 209 Available Values for the Dial Plan Field 280 Basic Network Settings 18 77 Basic Network Setup 18 Before Accessing the Web User Interface 22 BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING 220 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING 220 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING 221 BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING 221 BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_ TIMING 221 Block Anonymous Call 130 Block Caller ID 130 Busy Enable Call Forward 132 Busy Phone Number 133 Busy Tone 137 BUSY_TONE_FRQ 214 BUSY_TONE_GAIN 215 BUSY_TONE_RPT 215 BUSY_TONE_TIMING 215 C Call Control 123 126 127 Call Control Line 1 Line x 126 304 Administrator Guide Call Control Settings 160 165 205 242 280 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match 129 Call Features 130 Call Forward 128 131 132 133 244 Call Hold 120 241 Call log URL 145 Call Rejection Phone Numbers 126 Cancel Button 25 CFG_CYCLIC 184 CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL 185 CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH 184 CFG_FILE_KEY1 183 CFG_FILE_KEY2 184 CFG_FILE_KEY3 184 CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH 182 CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH 181 CFG_RESYNC_DURATION 186 CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP 186 CFG_RESYNC_TIME 185 CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH 201 CFG_RTRY_INTVL 185 CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH 180 Change Administrator Password 96 Change User Password 97 Channel 1 25 93 Characters Available for String Values 168 Checking t
303. ues When you use this feature the unit will return to the status just after performing the most recent provisioning or pre provisioning Notice s After performing Reset Web Settings the unit will restart automatically To avoid problems it is recommended that you save your settings before performing Reset Web Settings Note The settings configured through the phone user interface only will not be reset However settings that can be configured through both the phone user interface and Web user interface will be reset 30 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 1 2 2 Firmware Update 1 2 2 Firmware Update You can update the unit s firmware to improve the unit s operation You can configure the unit so that it automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location The firmware update will be executed when the unit is restarted For details see Section 7 Firmware Update Provisioning server Firmware server Configuration file Download Check for update Firmware download and update Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 31 1 2 2 Firmware Update 32 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 2 General Information on Provisioning This section provides an overview of the configuration file programming procedures for the unit including pre provisioning and provisioning Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 33 2 1 1 What is Pre provisioning
304. uide 71 4 2 1 Version Information 4 2 1 Version Information This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware version of the unit Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network VoIP Telephone Maintenance Version Information Status KT Model KX UTISX et IPL Version 01 14 Firmware Version Bank1 00 045 Bank2 00 021 4 2 1 1 Version Information Model Description Indicates the model number of the unit reference only Value Range Model number Default Value Current model number Operating Bank Description Indicates the storage area of the firmware that is currently operating reference only Value Range Bank e Bank Default Value Not applicable IPL Version Description Indicates the version of the IPL Initial Program Load that runs when starting the unit reference only Value Range IPL version nn nn n 0 9 Default Value Current IPL version Firmware Version Description Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the unit reference only Value Range Bank1 Bank2 Firmware version nn nnn n 0 9 72 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 4 2 2 Network Status Default Value Current firmware version 4 2 2 Network Status This screen allows you to view t
305. ument Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 233 5 6 1 Codec Settings CODEC_G729 PARAM Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to add an attribute line a fmtp 18 annexb no to SDP when the codec is set to G729A Value Range 0 Do not add a fmtp 18 annexb no e 1 Add a fmtp 18 annexb no Default Value 0 CODEC_ENABLEx_n Parameter Name Example CODEC_ENABLEx_ 1 CODEC_ENABLEx 2 CODEC_ENABLEx_ 6 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the codec specified in the parameter list Note e The x character in the parameter title should be changed to one of the following numbers according to the codec to be changed 0 G 722 1 PCMA 2 G6 726 32 3 G 729A 4 PCMU For codec setting examples see 2 5 1 Examples of Codec Settings Value Range e Y Enable N Disable Default Value Web User Interface Reference e 6722 Enable Page 120 es PCMA Enable Page 121 e G726 32 Enable Page 121 e G729A Enable Page 121 e PCMU Enable Page 122 CODEC_PRIORITYx_n Parameter Name Example CODEC_PRIORITYx_1 CODEC_PRIORITYx 2 CODEC_PRIORITYx_6 Value Format Integer Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 5 6 2 RTP Settings Description Specifies the priority order for the codec Note e The x character in the
306. urity of data on the server when operating High Low Configuration files are readable by anyone with access to the server Moreover there is another method configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server and then using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand they are encrypted when they are transferred This method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common configuration file using different encryption keys However as when downloading an unencrypted configuration file using HTTPS the server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files 2 3 Priority of Setting Methods The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods provisioning Web user interface programming etc This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by multiple methods Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 45 2 4 Configuration File Specifications The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied lower numbers indicate higher priority Setting Order Priority Setting Method 1 4 The factory default settings for the unit 2 3 Pre provisioning with the configuration file 2 3 Provisioning with the master configuration file 3 2 2 Provisioning with the product configuration file 2 1 Provisioning with the standard configuration file 4 4 Settings c
307. used with the XML application feature Panasonic KX UT136 Maintenance Telephone Web Port Close Telephone Call Control Export Phonebook Application settings Application Settings Application Bootup URL Application initial URL Incoming call URL Talking URL Making call URL Cc Cc II e URL Call log URL Idling UR Network Phonebook URL i Cc Cc D a a i pr ps i Network Phonebook URL Authentication Authentication ID Authentication Password 4 6 8 1 Application Bootup URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up to check for XML data Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 143 4 6 8 Application Settings Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_START_URL Page 229 4 6 8 2 Application initial URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started from the unit s menu to check for XML data Value Range Max 244 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL Page 229 4 6 8 3 Incoming call URL URL Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call to check for XML data Value R
308. vailability depends on your phone system Value Range Max 195 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI Page 205 Inter digit Timeout Description Specifies the length of time in seconds within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires after the last key was pressed dialing will start Value Range 1 15 Default Value 5 Configuration File Reference INTDIGIT_TIM Page 206 Timer for Dial Plan Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits when a T or t has been entered in the dial plan Value Range 1 15 Default Value 5 Configuration File Reference MACRODIGIT_TIM Page 206 International Call Prefix 124 Description Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first symbol when the phone number for incoming international calls contains Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 and Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE Page 206 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Country Calling Code 4 6 1 Call Control Description Specifies the country area calling code to be used for comparative purposes when dialing a number from the inc
309. vice 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER Dn Page 265 n SIP TimerD 52 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 2 6 Setting Configuration File Parameters Using TR 069 Parameter Name Requirement Ref TR 069 Parameter Configuration File Parameter TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER F n Page 266 n SIP TimerF TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER H_n Page 266 n SIP TimerH TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER_J_n Page 266 n SIP TimerJ TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_INVITE EXPIRE n Page 257 n SIP InviteExpires TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n Page 257 n SIP EventSubscribe i Notifier TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n Page 258 n SIP EventSubscribe i NotifierPort TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SUB_RTX_INTVL_n Page 260 n SIP EventSubscribe i ExpireTime TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile REG_RTX_INTVL_n Page 261 n SIP RegisterRetryInterval TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n Page 262 n SIP OutboundProxy TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n Page 263 n SIP OutboundProxyPort TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TRANSPORT_n Page 263 n SIP ProxyServerTransport TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile PHONE _NUMBER_n Page 247 n L
310. vice VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile TELEVENT_PAYLOAD Page 240 1 RTP TelephoneEventPayloadType TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_AUTHID_n Page 248 n Line 1 SIP AuthUserName TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_PASS n Page 249 n Line 1 SIP AuthPassword TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_URI_n Page 247 n Line 1 SIP URI TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n Page 249 n SIP ProxyServer TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_PRXY_ PORT o Page 249 n SIP ProxyServerPort TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n Page 250 n SIP RegistrarServer TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_RGSTR_ PORT o Page 250 n SIP RegistrarServerPort TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_SVCDOMAIN o Page 250 n SIP UserAgentDomain TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_SRC_PORT_n Page 249 n SIP UserAgentPort TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile REG EXPIRE TIME n Page 251 n SIP RegisterExpires TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile DSCP_SIP_n Page 252 n SIP DSCPMark TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER TI o Page 253 n SIP TimerT 1 TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER T2_n Page 253 n SIP TimerT2 TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER T4 n Page 254 n SIP TimerT4 TR 104 Device VoiceService 1 VoiceProfile SIP_TIMER B_n Page 265 n SIP TimerB TR 104 Device VoiceSer
311. word for the Administrator account and successfully reset the settings the message Complete is displayed the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Web Por Close Reset to Defaults Maintenance Reset Web Data The Web data for this unit will be reset to its default values when you click Reset Web Settings Provisioning Maintenance Management Server Reset Web Settings Restart 4 7 6 Restart This screen allows you to restart the unit by clicking Restart After you click this button a dialog box is displayed asking whether you want to restart the unit Click OK to perform a restart or Cancel not to Notice The unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface or on calls Panasonic KX UT136 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Restart Web Port Close Maintenance Click Restart to restart this unit Restarting will take a few moments Provisioning Management Server Reset to Defaults Restart 8 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 153 4 7 6 Restart 154 Administrator Guide Document Version 2013 03 Section 5 Configuration File Programming This section provides information about the configuration parameters used in the configuration files Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 155 5 1 Configuration File P
312. y the screen Otherwise an error 403 Forbidden will occur when you click Save 1 1 7 Other Network Settings 1 1 7 1 Firewall and Router Setup When the unit is connected to a network that is protected by a firewall and or router you need to configure the firewall and or router so that they do not block communication from the IP address and port number used by the unit Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 27 1 1 7 Other Network Settings 1 1 7 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup This section provides information about configuring a router that uses NAT Internet Global IP address XXX YVY 2ZZ 127 PC SIP Phone Private IP address Private IP address 192 168 228 111 192 168 228 12 If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each terminal on the network depending on your phone system s setup you might need to configure the unit and router so as to use NAT Traversal techniques If your phone system dealer provides an outbound proxy service that supports NAT Traversal you need only to set the IP address of the SIP outbound proxy server to the unit no other settings are necessary However depending on the phone system of the outbound proxy service no setting may be necessary because private IP addresses are automatically translated into global IP addresses by the outbound proxy server For details about the outbound proxy service consu
313. ype Parameter Label Name DN G DN v DN E I Flexible Button Settings Tone Settings DN dr Telephone Settings Import Phonebook DN Wi Export Phonebook Application Settings DN x e d o om d w pa DN ka 1 1 1 i DN v 1 1 1 1 4 6 3 1 Flexible Button Settings Type No 1 24 Description Selects the feature to be assigned to each flexible button Value Range e DN e One Touch e Headset e BLF e ACD e Wrap Up Default Value DN Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx Page 227 Parameter No 1 24 Description Specifies the necessary values for the features assigned to flexible buttons Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value 1 Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx Page 227 Document Version 2013 03 Administrator Guide 135 4 6 4 Tone Settings Label Name No 1 24 Description Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the flexible button is pressed Value Range Max 10 characters Note You can use Unicode characters for this setting Default Value For KX UT133 KX UT136 Not stored For KX UT248 No 1 1 No 2 2 No 3 3 No 24 24 Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx Page 228 4 6 4 Tone Settings This screen allows you to configure the dual tone frequencies and ringtone patterns of each tone

Panasonic KX-UT248NE LCD Wired handset Black IP phone

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents